JP7313085B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a characteristic performance is provided. A gaming machine comprising game progress means for progressing a game, effect control means for executing effects based on instructions from the game progress means, and operation means operable by a player, The game progressing means can generate a freeze state for waiting the progress of the game, and the effect control means can execute the first operation promotion effect that may be terminated based on the lapse of a predetermined time, and the game The first operation prompting effect may be started after the freeze state is started by the advancing means. [Selection drawing] Fig. 19

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by slot machines (pachislot game machines) and pachinko machines (ball game machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines. This slot machine is constructed such that when medals are inserted and a start lever is operated to rotate the reels, a combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and when a stop button is operated to stop the reels, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the reel window according to the internal determination to establish the combination. When a winning combination involving the payout of medals is established, a specified number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination is paid out.

Among such slot machines, there is an effect in which information regarding the operation of a stop button that derives a stop mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2016-87308

However, there is still room for improvement in the effects executed by such game machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a characteristic presentation.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the present invention, as one aspect thereof,
a game progress means for progressing a game;
Production control means for executing production based on instructions from the game progress means;
A gaming machine comprising an operating means operable by a player,
The game progress means is
It is possible to generate a freeze state that waits for the progress of the game,
The production control means is
It is capable of executing a first operation promotion effect that may end based on the elapse of a predetermined time,
It is possible to execute a second operation promotion effect that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time,
After the freeze state is started by the game progress means, there is a case where the first operation promotion effect is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
There is a case where the second operation promotion effect is started after the first operation promotion effect started after the freeze state is started (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
In the first case, in the frozen state, a period in which the operation to the operation means prompted by the first operation promotion effect is valid starts,
In the second case, after the freeze state ends, a period in which the operation for the operation means prompted by the second operation promotion effect is valid begins.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a characteristic presentation.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the character accompanying state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing characters displayed on the effect image display device in the character accompanying state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; (a) is a table schematically showing accompanying lottery processing in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a table schematically showing the CZ transition lottery processing in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing a time chart and an example of effect in the case of transitioning from a non-accompanied state to an accompanying state in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention and then transitioning to the non-accompanied state, and (b) is a diagram showing a time chart in the case of transition from the two-character accompanying state to the non-accompanied state in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of an effect in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of an effect in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing the character arrangement lottery process in the CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, (b) is a table schematically showing the selected character point lottery process in the CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the invention, and (c) is a table schematically showing the AT lottery process in the CZ of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the invention. 4 is a table showing lottery probabilities of pressing order bells of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, maximum payout number in the case of correct operation, display mode and payout number for each operation content; It is an example of an effect in a predetermined game of CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing accompanying lottery processing in the normal AT state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a table schematically showing the number addition lottery processing and the special zone lottery processing in the normal AT state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart and effects of a game in which 123 additional coins are obtained by winning the pushing order bell_LCR in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect of a game in which an additional number of 231 coins is obtained by winning the pushing order bell_RLC in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart and effects of a game in which the push order bell _RCL is won in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, winning a prize, and obtaining 321 extra coins. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112). (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting value confirmation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of another device monitoring process; (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of setting change mode in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of setting confirmation mode in a time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the display example 1 of the management screen in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the display example 3 of the management screen in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the example 1 of a display of a management screen and an error notification in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of setting history display in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in time series when the management screen is not displayed. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in a time series when the management screen is displayed. It is a simple game flow showing the game state of the AT system. (a) It is the figure which showed the example of transition of the production|presentation state in an advantageous area. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in a normal stage. (c) A diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for a CZ lottery during stock time. It is a diagram showing an example of production in stock time in chronological order. It is a diagram showing an example of production in a normal stage in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines of the slot machine 100. FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112). It is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, names of condition devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts, and remarks. (a) It is a diagram showing a symbol combination, a payout number, and a remark corresponding to a small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and a small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination). (b) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game in which the small win 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game. (c) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the setting suggestion effect A in the game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination) is internally won. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect A selection table used in the setting suggestion effect A lottery. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example 1 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing example 2 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B in chronological order; 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 62 is a flow chart showing the flow of initial setting processing (step S101) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 61; FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S206) in the initial setting processing of FIG. 62; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the flow of device monitoring processing (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt processing of FIG. 64; FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing of FIG. 65; FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process of FIG. 65; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example when setting change is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example when setting value confirmation is executed. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting change execution, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation execution. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the setting key SW is ON; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of error notification and error cancellation operations; (A) is a diagram showing an operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart regarding error detection. It is a figure which shows the modification of error notification and error cancellation. It is a figure which shows the modification at the time of closing the front door 102 during setting value confirmation execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement for confirmation of a shutter. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement for confirmation of a speaker. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement for confirmation of a shutter.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, starts to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery. This game machine advances a series of games in which game media are paid out and terminated if a predetermined payout condition is met, and the game is terminated without paying out game media if they are not met.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are accommodated in the center of the main body 101, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light blocking piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, when one medal is betted, the middle horizontal prize line is valid, when two medals are bet, three additional upper horizontal prize lines and lower horizontal prize lines are valid, and when three medals are bet, five lines including the right downward prize line and the upward right prize line are valid as the prize lines. Note that the number of pay lines 114 is not limited to five lines, and may be one horizontal pay line in the middle. Further, for example, when one medal is bet, 5 lines of a middle horizontal prize line, an upper horizontal prize line, a lower horizontal prize line, a lower right prize line and an upper right prize line may be set as valid prize lines, or the same number of prize lines may be uniformly set as valid prize lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp for notifying the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically (bet operation) by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating a stop button 137 (sometimes called a left stop button), the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating a stop button 138 (sometimes called a middle stop button), and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating a stop button 139 (sometimes called a right stop button).

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". In addition, in this embodiment, the stop operation and the operation order by the combination of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is sometimes written as "left", the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110, the second stop reel as the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel as the right reel 112 is sometimes written as "left center right". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown, effect image display device) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed on the slot machine. It has a structure that appears in front of 100 (player side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later. For example, operation navigation is executed to report information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various information for individual players). The information display button 191 is composed of a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects one of a plurality of options. The cross key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow by operating the respective arrow keys. The OK button 191b is a button for confirming an option on which the cursor is positioned. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of information setting by the user menu, in the case of volume setting, light amount setting, etc., it is used in the character (stage) selection of the effect executed after winning the bonus prize. In this embodiment, the information display button 191 may be referred to as a cross button 191 .

The production button 192 is a button that becomes operable when executing an production prompting the operation of the button. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 192 is operated, as a response effect, an effect suggesting the provision of a privilege such as the number of extra coins in the AT is executed.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to use a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects images and various game information. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control section 300 that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control section 400.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery for winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WD. A T (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical values within the clock signal entered from the crystal oscillator 315a, and an activation signal output circuit 338, which outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU304 starts gaming control when the startup signal is entered from this activation signal output circuit 338 (starts the main control unit main treatment described later).

The main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medals paid out from the medal payout device 180 at each interrupt time. Medal payout sensor, reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, information display button 191 sensor, performance button 192 sensor, etc.) are monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and detect an insertion operation when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . The information display button 191 sensor detects operation of the information display button 191 , and the effect button 192 sensor detects operation of the effect button 192 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 for driving the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, and the game start. A drive circuit 328 is provided for driving the lamp 121, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (eg, game state) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-controller 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp 123, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.

A drive circuit 425 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the above-described reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 1 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 1 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the reels 110 to 112, respectively. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece of the left reel 110 has a "bell" pattern, the number 1 piece of the middle reel 111 has a "watermelon" pattern, and the right reel 112 number 2 piece has a "seven 1" pattern.

<Slot machine processing>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value for the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition setting, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314 and initial value setting are performed.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by a sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion port 141, and if there is an insertion operation, the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

Further, whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated is checked based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and when it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of medals inserted is determined, and preparations are made to transmit a start lever reception command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-controller 400. - 特許庁

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery processing for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT system game state), and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control part 400, and when the result of the winning combination internal lottery is a loss (a winning combination is not won), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating loss to the first sub-control part 400. - 特許庁

The internal winning probability of each winning combination is obtained by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination by the numerical data within the range of random numbers (65536 in this embodiment) obtained during the internal lottery described later. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, the lottery data are prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and a game parlor clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In reel stop control processing, it is possible to accept stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pushed, the stop data of the reel stop data is referred to stop one of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawing frames set in the stop data in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pushed stop button. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a stop button reception command related to the stopped stop buttons 137 to 139 for each stop operation (more specifically, a stop button reception 1 command for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 2 command for the second stop operation, and a stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for each reel stop, a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, and a stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) Preparations are made to transmit a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation and a reel stop 3 command for the third stop operation to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination processing, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when the symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has won. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to shift the game state (RT system game state, AT system game state), and for example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment).

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the signals are stored in the signal state storage areas provided separately for each sensor 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control part 400, it is possible to determine the performance control according to the change of the game control in the main control part 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and to determine the performance control contents based on the information of the command data included in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and when an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 4 is performed.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 6(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(c). The first sub-controller 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 6A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 7A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets an instruction to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903, and if not, it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 of image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) forming the display image. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal is input.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the playability of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing an overall game flow, and is a transition diagram of game states (also called AT-type game states, hereinafter abbreviated as game states) relating to the effects of the main control unit 300. FIG.

· Advantageous Section/Non-advantageous Section First, the game state is broadly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. The non-advantageous section is the initial state, and is a period during which operation navigation cannot be performed. A non-advantageous section normal state exists in the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a period during which operation navigation can be performed. Here, the operation navigation is an effect of notifying the contents of the stop operation to help win a prize by using the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127, and is an effect of notifying the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internal winning combination). The advantageous section includes an advantageous section normal state, a challenge zone (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ), a normal AT state, a specialized zone, a pullback chance zone, and an ending state. In the present embodiment, the non-advantageous section normal state, the advantageous section normal state, and the CZ are collectively referred to as "normal state". Also, the normal AT state, the specialized zone, the withdrawal chance zone, and the ending state are collectively referred to as "AT state".

Regarding the state transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section, if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section normal state (for example, based on the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination is not lost), the state transitions to the advantageous section normal state (see route R1 in FIG. 8(a)). On the other hand, when the AT state of the advantageous section ends, the state shifts to the non-advantageous section normal state of the non-advantageous section (see route R2 in FIG. 8A). However, even if the AT state ends, there may be cases where the transition to the non-advantageous section does not occur (for example, when the AT state ends and transitions to the advantageous section normal state). Note that the AT state of the present embodiment is a difference number management type AT state, and when the number of difference sheets in the AT state reaches a specified number of sheets, the AT state ends. Here, the number difference means the difference between the number of game media (for example, medals) paid out and the number of game media inserted.

- Character Accompanying State Note that in the present embodiment, the game state can be classified from the viewpoint of which character accompanies the main character (Ten). Hereinafter, this game state will be referred to as a character accompanying state. In the character accompanying state, there are a "non-accompanied state" in which only the lord appears in the production, a "princess accompanying state" in which the princess appears in the production accompanied by the lord, an "old man accompanying state" in which the old man appears in the production accompanied by the lord, and an "old man & princess accompanying state" in which the princess and the old man appear in the production. The princess accompanying state, the grandpa accompanying state, and the grandpa & princess accompanying state are also collectively referred to as "accompanying state". In this embodiment, the accompanying state is more advantageous for the player than the non-accompaniing state. For example, the probability of transitioning from the current game state to a more advantageous game state is set to be high (for example, the probability of transition from the normal state of the advantageous section to the CZ state, the transition from the CZ to the AT state, the transition from the AT state to the special zone, etc. is high), the continuation of the advantageous game state is set to be longer (for example, the AT is added and the end condition of the AT state is set more favorably), special effects (for example, executed when the corresponding role of the companion character described later is won) corresponding role winning notification effect, etc.) is executed.

FIG. 9 shows characters displayed on the effect image display device 157 in each character accompanying state. Specifically, FIG. 9(a) shows the character in the non-accompanied state, FIG. 9(b) shows the character in the princess accompanying state, FIG. 9(c) shows the character in the grandpa accompanying state, and FIG. 9(d) shows the character in the grandpa & princess accompanying state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the character accompanying state exists in the advantageous zone normal state, CZ, and normal AT state. FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the game state and the character accompanying state shown in FIG. 8(a). For example, in the normal state of the advantageous section, there are a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an old man accompanying state, and an old man & princess accompanying state. However, the character accompanying state may be set in a game state other than the advantageous section normal state, CZ, or normal AT state. For example, the character accompanying state may be set in the ending state. In this case, if the character corresponding to the accompanying character, which will be described later, is won in the ending state, a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value may be executed, or the probability of executing the effect may be increased.

· Advantageous section normal state In the advantageous section normal state, the CZ shift lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the CZ state is executed every game. If the CZ shift lottery is won, the advantageous section normal state is shifted to CZ (see route R3 in FIG. 8A). As a rare case, when a special condition is established (for example, when a rare combination is won), the advantageous section normal state does not go through the CZ state from the advantageous section normal state, and there is a case where the advantageous section normal state directly shifts to the AT state (see route R4 in FIG. 8A).

FIG. 10(a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used in the accompanying lottery process) in the normal state of the advantageous section, and FIG. 10(b) is a table schematically showing the CZ shift lottery process (more specifically, the CZ entry lottery table used in the CZ shift lottery process) in the normal state of the advantageous section.

The accompanying lottery process is a lottery process for determining an accompanying character, and is executed every game. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, the accompanying lottery process is executed based on the winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. For example, when the watermelon is won, the old man is selected as the accompanying character with a selection rate of 25%, when the chance wins, the old man is selected as the accompanying character with a selection rate of 100%, when the weak cherry is won, the princess is selected as the accompanying character with a selection rate of 25%, and when the strong cherry is won, the princess is selected as the accompanying character with a selection rate of 100%.

Note that the initial character accompaniment state in the advantageous section normal state is the non-accompaniment state. In addition, once set accompanying state (for example, princess accompanying state, old man accompanying state, old man & princess accompanying state) is maintained during the guaranteed number of games (for example, 20 games in the present embodiment), and an accompanying end lottery that is executed every game after the guaranteed number of games has passed (specifically, a princess accompanying end drawing to end the princess accompanying state, an old man accompanying state to end the old man accompanying state, and an old man and princess accompanying state to end the princess accompanying state). It is determined whether the accompanying state ends or continues based on the results of the princess accompanying end lottery and the grandpa accompanying ending lottery that ends the accompanying state. For example, the accompanying end lottery may be a lottery with a winning probability of 1/2 based on the bet operation or the start lever operation, or the accompanying state may be ended when the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process is replay. Also, in a state in which two characters are accompanying, that is, in a state in which an old man and a princess are accompanying, the accompanying state is regulated so that the accompanying state does not end two games in a row. This is a measure to reduce player disappointment. For example, in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, if the state of accompanying the old man ends in the N game, the state of accompanying the princess does not end in the N+1 game. Hereinafter, this regulation is also referred to as an accompanying termination regulation. In the present embodiment, the accompanying end regulation is set so that the accompanying state does not end after playing two games in succession, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if one accompaniment end lottery is won, it may be regulated not to win another accompany end lottery for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games).

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the present embodiment, accompanying characters and winning combinations are associated with each other. Specifically, the character associated with Watermelon and Chance Eye is Old Man, and the character associated with Weak Cherry and Strong Cherry is Princess. Hereinafter, the winning role associated with the accompanying character will be referred to as the "corresponding role of the accompanying character".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the CZ shift lottery process is executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. For example, in the non-accompanying state, the probability of winning CZ when watermelon or weak cherry is won is 0%, and the winning probability of CZ when winning chance or strong cherry is 2%. Further, for example, in the case of the old accompanying state, the probability of winning the CZ when winning the watermelon is 25%, the probability of winning the CZ when winning the second chance is 55%, and the probability of winning the CZ when winning the weak cherry or strong cherry is 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10B, in the present embodiment, transition to CZ is easier in the accompanying state than in the non-accompaniing state. In addition, even in the accompanying state, the transition to CZ is easier when two characters are accompanying (grandfather & princess accompanying state) than when one character is accompanying (princess accompanying state, grandpa accompanying state). In addition, in the internal winning combination lottery process in the accompanying state, when the corresponding combination of the accompanying character is won, the transition to CZ is easier than when the other combination is won.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the corresponding role of the old man (watermelon, chance) in the state of accompanying the old man and shifting to CZ is the same as the probability of winning the corresponding role of the princess (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the state of accompanying the princess and shifting to CZ.

- Game Progress in Advantageous Section Normal State Next, the game progress in the advantageous section normal state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect example showing how the game progresses in chronological order in the case of shifting from the non-accompanied state to the accompanying state and then to the non-accompanied state.

FIG. 11(a) shows a case where, since the accompanying lottery was won in the M+1 game (in the case of winning the accompanying lottery based on the weak cherry winning; see FIG. 10(a)), the princess accompanying state starts from the M+1 game, and the guaranteed number of games of the princess accompanying state ends in the M+21 game. Although the state of accompanying the princess is started from the M+1 game, the effect image display device 157 of the M+1 game is executing a precursor effect of accompanying the princess (for example, the princess appears only half on the screen. See FIG. 11(a-1)). As described above, the character accompaniment state and the effect state on the effect image display device 157 do not necessarily match. Incidentally, even if the performance image display device 157 is executing the precursor effect of accompanying the princess, the state of accompanying the character is the state of accompanying the princess, so the CZ shift lottery is performed based on the state of accompanying the princess (see FIG. 10(b)). However, when the precursor effect is being executed, the CZ shift lottery may be performed based on the non-accompanying state.

In addition, FIG. 11(a) shows a case where the guaranteed number of games in the state of accompanying the princess has ended in the M+21st game, so the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the M+22nd game, and the non-accompanied state starts from the M+23rd game because the accompanying end lottery (princess's accompanying end lottery) has been won in the M+23rd game. In the M+22nd game, the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) was not won, so an image of the princess accompanying state is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 11(a-2)). An image of the state is displayed (see FIG. 11(a-4)).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the accompanying state ends, the accompanying character is erased via the blackout or whiteout end image, and then the non-accompaniing state image is displayed. The player can be made to clearly recognize that the state of accompanying the character has changed. Note that the transition from the accompanying state image to the non-accompanied state image is not limited to this method. For example, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may be temporarily blocked using a fusuma (sliding door) or shutter, and then the transition may be made, or when the accompanying state ends, the stage may be changed to clearly notify that the character accompanying state has changed.

FIG. 11(b) is a time chart showing in chronological order how the game progresses when the two characters transition from the accompanying state to the non-accompaniing state.

FIG. 11(b) shows a case where, after the N games of the princess accompanying state (20 remaining games), the accompanying lottery was won in the N+1 game (in the case of winning the accompanying lottery based on winning the watermelon, see FIG. 10(a)), the grandpa & princess accompanying state starts from the N+1 game, the guaranteed number of games of the princess accompanying state ends in the N+21 game, and the guaranteed number of games of the grandpa accompanying state ends in the N+22 game. are

In addition, FIG. 11(b) shows a case where the guaranteed number of games in the state of accompanying the princess has ended in the N+21 game, so the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+22 game, and the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) has been won in the N+22 game, so the N+22 game is in the grandpa accompanying state.

Also, FIG. 11(b) shows a case where the guaranteed number of games in the grandpa accompaniment state has ended in the N+22nd game, so the accompaniment end lottery (grandfather accompaniment end lottery) is started from the N+23rd game, and the accompaniment end lottery (grandfather accompaniment end lottery) is won in the N+23rd game, but the grandpa accompaniment state is maintained due to the aforementioned accompanying end regulation. However, since he won the accompaniment end lottery (grand accompaniment end lottery) of the N+24th game of the next game, the grandpa accompaniment state is ended, and the non-accompaniment state is started in the N+24th game. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely discouraged because the accompaniment state is restricted from ending over two consecutive games.

Effect of Advantageous Section Normal State Next, the effect of the advantageous section normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. FIGS. 12 and 13 show examples of effects in one predetermined game in the normal state of the advantageous section.

FIG. 12(a) is an example of an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of a game in a non-accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(a-1)) and a weak cherry is won. According to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 12(a), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning indication effect that suggests winning either a weak cherry or a watermelon is executed (see image d1 in FIG. 12(a-2)), and after the third stop operation, based on the winning of a weak cherry, a winning notification effect for weak cherries is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 12(a-3)).

FIG. 12(b) is an example of an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(b-1)) and the weak cherry wins. According to the effect example shown in FIG. 12(b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either a weak cherry or a watermelon is executed (see image d1 in FIG. 12(b-2)), and after the third stop operation, based on the winning of a weak cherry, a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 12(b-3)), and a weak cherry winning notification effect dedicated to the princess accompanying state is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 12(b-3)). See image d3 of 12(b-3), for example, image d3) in which the princess has a smiling expression, unlike her resting state. In this manner, when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect is executed to suggest that the accompanying character (princess) wins the corresponding role (weak cherry). In the princess accompanying state, strong cherry is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, so in the winning role internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state, strong cherry is won, and even if strong cherry wins, image d3 is displayed, and a corresponding role winning notification effect (see image d3 in FIG. 12 (b-3)) that suggests that the accompanying character wins the corresponding role (strong cherry) is executed.

As a result, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the weak cherry or the strong cherry in the state of accompanying the princess, that is, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character can be made to recognize that the special presentation has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character by executing the corresponding role winning notification performance. For the player who knows that it is advantageous to win the weak cherry or the strong cherry in the state of accompanying the princess, that is, the player who knows that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character, by executing the corresponding role winning notification performance, the fact that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role can be emphasized and the player's willingness to play can be stimulated.

FIG. 12(c) is an example of an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when watermelon is won and watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(c-1)). According to the effect example shown in FIG. 12(c), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see image d1 in FIG. 12(c-2)), and after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed based on watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 12(c-3)). Since Suika is not the corresponding role of the accompanying character in the princess accompanying state, unlike FIG.

FIG. 13(a) is an example of an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when watermelon is won and watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandpa accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 13(a-1)). According to the effect example shown in FIG. 13(a), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see image d1 in FIG. 13(a-2)), and after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed based on watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 13(a-3)), and a watermelon winning notification effect dedicated to the accompanying state is executed (see image d4 in FIG. 13(a-3)). See image d5 in 13(a-3), for example, image d5 where the old man has a smiling expression, unlike the resting state. In this way, when the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect (see image d5 in FIG. 13(a-3)) that suggests that the accompanying character's corresponding role (watermelon) is won is executed. In the accompanying state, the chance is also the accompanying character's corresponding role. A corresponding role winning notification effect suggesting winning is executed.

As a result, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or the chance eye in the state of accompanying the old man, that is, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character can be made to recognize that the special presentation has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character by executing the corresponding role winning notification performance. For the player who knows that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or the chance eye in the state of accompanying the old man, that is, the player who knows that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character, by executing the corresponding role winning notification performance, the fact that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role can be emphasized and the player's willingness to play can be stimulated.

FIG. 13(b) is an example of an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess (see the character in FIG. 13(b-1)) and the weak cherry wins. According to the effect example shown in FIG. 13(b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning indication effect suggesting winning of either a weak cherry or a watermelon is executed (see image d1 in FIG. 13(b-2)), and based on the third stop operation, winning a weak cherry, a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 13(b-3)), and a weak cherry winning notification effect dedicated to the accompanying state of Grandpa & Princess is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 13(b-3)). See image d3 and image d5 in Fig. 12(b-3), for example, image d3 in which the princess has a smiling expression and image d5 in which the old man has a smiling expression, unlike when the old man and the princess are in a stopped state. In this way, when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect (see images d3 and d5 in FIG. 12(b-3)) is executed to suggest that the corresponding role (weak cherry) of the accompanying character (princess) is won.In addition, in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, the strong cherry, the chance, and the watermelon are also the corresponding characters of the accompanying character, so in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the state of the old man and the princess, the strong cherry, the chance, or the watermelon are won. , a cherry, a chance eye, or a watermelon, an image d3 and an image d5 are displayed, and a corresponding role winning notification performance suggesting that the companion character wins the corresponding role (strong cherry, chance eye, watermelon) is executed.

FIG. 13(c) is an example of an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 when watermelon is won and watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandpa & princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 13(c-1)). According to the production example shown in FIG. 13(c), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning indication effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see image d1 in FIG. 13(c-2)), and based on the watermelon winning after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify of watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 13(c-3)), and a watermelon winning notification effect dedicated to the accompanying old man & princess state is executed. (See image d3 and image d5 in FIG. 12(c-3). For example, image d3 in which the princess has a smiling expression and image d5 in which the old man has a smiling expression, unlike when the old man and the princess are in the stopped state). In this way, when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, the corresponding role winning notification effect (see images d3 and d5 in FIG. 12(c-3)) suggesting that the corresponding role (watermelon) of the accompanying character (old man) is won is executed.

In this way, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon, the chance, the weak cherry or the strong cherry in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, that is, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character can be made to recognize that the special presentation has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect. For the player who knows that it is advantageous to win the watermelon, the second chance, the weak cherry or the strong cherry in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, that is, the player who knows that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the companion character, by executing the corresponding role winning notification presentation, the fact that the companion character has won the corresponding role can be emphasized and the player's willingness to play can be stimulated. In particular, the state in which two characters accompany the player is more advantageous than the state in which one character accompanies (see FIG. 10(b)), so that the interest of the player can be further improved when the corresponding role winning notification performance by the two accompanying characters is executed.

In the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, the image d3 displayed in the corresponding role notification effect in the state of accompanying the princess and the image d5 displayed in the corresponding role notifying effect in the state of accompanying the princess are displayed as corresponding role winning notification effects.

・CZ
CZ is a game state in which points are to be obtained during a predetermined period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment). After the end of a predetermined period, CZ executes an AT lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period. If the AT lottery process is won in CZ, the AT normal state is entered (see route R5 in FIG. 8(a)), and if the AT lottery process is not won, the advantageous section normal state is entered (see route R3 in FIG. 8(a)). FIG. 14(c) is a table schematically showing the AT lottery process (more specifically, an AT lottery table for each point used in the AT lottery process).

As shown in FIG. 14(c), in the present embodiment, when the total value of points acquired in the period of 20 games is 500 points or 0 to 50 points, there is a probability of 100%, that is, the transition to the AT state is ensured. Also, in the case of 51 points or more, the higher the total number of points acquired toward 500 points, the higher the probability of shifting to the AT state.

The character accompaniment state of CZ is determined by executing an accompany lottery process at the time of transition from the advantageous section normal state. The determined companion character is the same for the period of 20 games. Specifically, in the accompanying lottery process, either the princess or the grandpa is determined, so the princess accompanying state or the grandpa accompanying state is set and the CZ is started (see FIG. 8(b)). In other words, in CZ, the non-accompanied state and the grandpa & princess accompanying state are not set.

A mechanism for giving points to CZ in the accompanying state set in this way will be described with reference to FIGS. Incidentally, FIG. 16 shows an example of an effect in one predetermined game of CZ.

In CZ, a character corresponding to each reel is determined by character arrangement lottery processing at the time of betting operation for each game. FIG. 14A is a table schematically showing the character arrangement lottery process (more specifically, the character arrangement pattern lottery table used for the character arrangement lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 80% and pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 20%. When pattern 1 is selected, the left reel 110 is associated with a non-accompanied character, the center reel 111 is associated with a lord, and the right reel 112 is associated with an accompanying character. On the other hand, when pattern 2 is selected, Shinobu is associated with the left reel 110 , Tono is associated with the middle reel 111 , and Accompanying Character is associated with the right reel 112 . That is, in either case, the companion character set in the character arrangement lottery process is associated with the right reel 112 . For example, in the game shown in FIG. 16(a), pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIG. 16(a-1)). Note that the game shown in FIG. 16(b) and the game shown in FIG. 16(c) also show a case where pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIGS. 16(b-1) and 16(c-1)).

In the game of CZ after such character arrangement, when the pushing order bell is internally won and the content of the first stop operation matches the content of notification of the operation navigation, the number of points based on the character associated with the first stop reel of the game can be obtained.

Here, first, the pushing order bell of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 15 . FIG. 15 is a table showing the lottery probability of the pressing order bell, the number of payouts in the case of a correct operation, the display mode and the number of payouts for each operation content, according to the present embodiment. The pressing order bell is composed of overlapping combinations, and when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combinations are different according to the contents of the stop operation (for example, the order of the stop operation), and the number of payouts is also different. The maximum payout number is given when the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Note that (1) left-center-right stop operation is sometimes referred to as LCR operation, (2) left-right center stop operation is LRC operation, (3) center-right-left stop operation is CLR operation, (4) center right-left stop operation is CRL operation, (5) right-left center stop operation is RLC operation, and (6) right-center-left stop operation is RCL operation.

(2) Push order bell _LRC with LCR operation as the correct operation; (3) Push order bell _CLR with CLR operation as the correct operation; (4) Push order bell _CRL with CRL operation as the correct operation; (5) Push order bell _RLC with RLC operation as the correct operation; It is subdivided into six. For example, when the push order bell_LCR is internally won and the LCR operation is performed, when the LCR operation which is the correct stop operation is performed, 6 medals are paid out and the push order bell_CRL is internally won when the correct stop operation is performed, and 13 medals are paid out when the push order bell_RCL is internally won and the correct stop operation, the RCL operation, is performed.

In addition, in CZ, when an internal win is made for the push order bell, operation navigation is executed. Therefore, in a game in which the pressing order bell of CZ is internally won, if the stop operation of the correct answer is performed according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, it is possible to obtain the maximum number of payouts that can be given in the game and the number of points of the character associated with the first stop reel. Here, the number of points based on the character (hereinafter also referred to as the selected character) associated with the first stop reel is determined by the selected character point lottery process. FIG. 14B is a table schematically showing the selected character point lottery process (more specifically, a point lottery table for each selected character used in the selected character point lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14B, when the selected character is a non-accompanying character, 25 points are awarded with a selection probability of 80%, and 55 points are awarded with a selection probability of 20%. When the selected character is an accompanying character, 25 points are given with a selection probability of 10%, 55 points are given with a selection probability of 45%, 100 points are given with a probability of 35%, and 200 points are given with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the present embodiment, the expected value of acquired points is set to be higher when the selected character is a lord or a shinobi (both expected points are 61.25) than when the selected character is a non-accompanied character (expected point value of 31), and the expected value of points to be obtained is set to be greater when the selected character is an accompanying character (expected point value is 82.25) than when the selected character is a lord or shinobi. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easy to obtain high points when the selected character is the companion character. In other words, it is set so that the expected value of points acquired when the winning order Bell_RCL or Bell_RCL is the pressing order bell whose correct answer is the first stop operation right and the first stop reel is right.

Effect of CZ Fig. 16(a) is an example of the effect when the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the content notified by the operation navigation system in the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112), and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification content of the operation navigation. . That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is Tono and the point number of 55 with a selection rate of 55% is selected.

In this case, a character is arranged and displayed on each reel based on the betting operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation effect image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, as shown in FIG. 16(a-2), the number 312 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel based on the order of the correct stop operation. Note that the number of the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number of other stop operations), and the number of points acquired is displayed together with the selected character after the first stop operation (for example, , characters such as 55Pt are displayed along with the image of the buttocks), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in CZ is displayed (eg, display of 55Pt, etc. in the upper right of the screen).

FIG. 16(b) is an example of a presentation in a princess accompanying state (more precisely, a princess accompanying state in which pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the prince is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14B, the selected character is Hime (accompanied character), and the effect is shown when the number of points of 200 with a selection rate of 10% is selected.

In this case, a character is arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation effect image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-2, the number 321 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation. Note that the number of the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers of other stop operations), and the number of points acquired is displayed together with the selected character after the first stop operation (for example, , characters such as "get 200 points" are displayed along with the image of the princess), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in CZ is displayed (eg, display of 200 points, etc. in the upper right of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) is an example of a presentation in a princess accompanying state (more precisely, a princess accompanying state in which pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the prince is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is an old man (a non-accompanied character), and the effect is shown when the point number of 25 with a selection rate of 80% is selected.

In this case, a character is arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation effect image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-2, the number 123 is displayed according to the correct stop operation according to the position of the corresponding reel. Note that the number of the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number of other stop operations), and after the first stop operation, the number of points acquired is displayed together with the selected character (for example, ), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in CZ is displayed (for example, 250 Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen).

In FIG. 16, the game in which the pushing order bell is internally won in the CZ is explained, but even in the game in which the pushing order bell is not internally won in the CZ, the character arrangement lottery processing is executed and the characters corresponding to each reel are arranged and displayed, but the selected character point lottery processing is not executed, so the points are not awarded.

Also, in the above description, CZ is a fixed period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), but it is not limited to this. For example, when a rare combination is won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the game period of CZ may be extended, or the number of games may not be counted.

Normal AT state The normal AT state is initially set to end when the difference number of sheets in the AT state reaches the initial ending difference number of sheets (for example, 300 sheets per set in this embodiment). In the normal AT state, each game, a number addition lottery process for adding the number to the initial ending difference number and a specialized zone lottery process for determining whether to shift to the specialized zone are executed. When winning the number addition lottery, the number determined by the number addition lottery is added to the initial ending difference number. This added difference number is referred to as the end difference number of addition. In the normal AT state, the normal AT state ends when the difference number of sheets reaches the initial ending difference number of sheets or the additional ending difference number of sheets. When the normal AT state ends, it shifts to the withdrawal chance zone (see route R6 in FIG. 8(a)). Also, when winning the specialized zone lottery process in the normal AT state, the player moves to the specialized zone (see route R7 in FIG. 8A). The special zone is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily add the number of coins, and the additional number given in the special zone is added to the end difference number of the addition. Also, when the difference number of sheets in the normal AT state is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment), the state shifts to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 8A).

FIG. 17A is a table schematically showing accompanying lottery processing in the normal AT state (more specifically, accompanying lottery table used in accompanying lottery processing). The accompanying lottery processing is lottery processing for determining accompanying characters. The contents of the companion lottery table shown in FIG. 17(a) are the same as the contents of the companion lottery table in the normal state of the advantageous section, so the description is omitted. That is, in the present embodiment, the companion character and the winning combination are associated even in the normal AT state. It should be noted that the initial character accompaniment state, which is familiar with the normal AT state, is the non-accompaniment state.

FIG. 17B is a table schematically showing the number-addition lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process (more specifically, the number-addition selection table used for the number-addition lottery process and the specialized zone lottery table used for the special zone lottery process). The number-adding lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process are executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process, respectively. For example, in the number addition lottery process, in the non-accompanying state, when the watermelon or weak cherry is internally won, the number is added with a winning probability of 1%, and when the second chance or strong cherry is internally won, the number is added with a winning probability of 10%. In addition, for example, in the lottery process for adding the number, when the watermelon is internally won in the old accompanying state, the number is added with a winning probability of 20%, when the internal winning is made at the chance, the number is added with a winning probability of 40%, when the weak cherry is internally won, the number is added with a winning probability of 1%, and when the strong cherry is internally won, the number is added with a winning probability of 10%. It should be noted that the additional number of sheets given in the number addition lottery process is a predetermined number (for example, 20 sheets, 50 sheets, etc.).

Further, for example, in the special zone lottery processing, in the non-accompanying state, when a watermelon or a weak cherry is internally won, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 0.5%, and when an internal win is made with a chance or a strong cherry, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 1%. For example, in the special zone lottery process, when the princess is accompanied by a watermelon, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 0.5%, when the player wins internally at a chance, moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 1%, when the weak cherry wins internally, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 5%, and when the strong cherry wins internally, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 17B, in the present embodiment, the accompanying state has a higher probability of adding the number of cards than the non-accompaniing state, and the shift to the specialized zone is facilitated. In addition, in the winning combination internal lottery process in the accompanying state, when the corresponding combination of the accompanying character is won, the probability of adding the number is higher than when winning other combinations, and the shift to the specialized zone is facilitated. Even in the accompanied state, the probability of adding the number of characters is higher when two characters are accompanied than when one character is accompanied, and the transition to the specialized zone is facilitated.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the grandpa's corresponding role (watermelon, chance) and winning the number-adding lottery process or the special zone lottery process in the state of accompanying the old man is the same as the probability of winning the number-adding lottery process or the special zone lottery process by winning the princess's corresponding role (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the princess accompanying state. can also be treated preferentially.

Retraction Chance Zone A withdrawal chance zone is a gaming state during a predetermined period (for example, 30 games in this embodiment) in which there is a possibility of returning to the normal AT state. In the pullback chance zone, an AT pullback lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to return to the normal AT state. If the AT withdrawal lottery process during the predetermined period is won, the state is shifted to the normal AT state (see route R6 in FIG. 8A). On the other hand, if the AT pullback lottery is not won during the predetermined period, the state is shifted to the non-advantageous section normal state (see route R2 in FIG. 8A). The AT withdrawal lottery may be determined, for example, based on the winning combination in the internal winning combination lottery process. The withdrawal chance zone is a game state in which the execution frequency of operation navigation is lower than in the normal AT state.

- Ending state When the difference number of sheets in the AT state is equal to or greater than a first threshold value (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment), the normal AT state shifts to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 8A). In the ending state, it is a game state in which the number addition is not executed. Also, when the difference number of sheets in the AT state reaches the second threshold value (for example, 2400 sheets in the case of the present embodiment) in the ending state, the ending state is ended and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section normal state (see route R2 in FIG. 8(a)).

Special Zone The special zone consists of a predetermined game period (for example, 5 games in the case of the present embodiment), and is a game state in which it is easy to add the number of games. When the additional number of sheets is provided in the specialized zone, the added number of sheets is added to the end difference number of additional sheets. When all the games in the specialized zone have been played, the state shifts to the normal AT state (see route R7 in FIG. 8(a)). In the special zone, when the push order bell is internally won and the internally won push order bell is won, the number of numbers indicating the operation order (more specifically, the three-digit number notified by the operation navigation, for example, 123 in the case of push order bell_LCR) becomes the additional number as it is. In addition, in a game in which the bell is internally won in the pressing order in the special zone, a freeze is generated before the operation navigation is generated so as to improve the player's sense of expectation. Freeze is a standby state for delaying the acceptance timing of the next operation, and during the freeze period, the player's operation is not accepted such as the reels 11 to 112 not starting to rotate even if the start lever 135 is operated, or the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not accepted. The production during the freeze period is referred to as a freeze production. Note that the freeze time of the present embodiment has a plurality of time patterns, and there is a tendency that the longer the freeze time is, the more the additional number of sheets is increased.

Rendering of Specialized Zone The rendering of the specialized zone will be described below with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. In FIGS. 18 to 20, the upper stage is a time chart showing the progress of one predetermined game in the specialized zone, and the lower stage is a diagram showing the state of the reels 110 to 112 at each point in the upper time chart and the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 18 shows a game in which the pressing order bell_LCR is won in the specialized zone, the LCR operation is performed, the upper bell is won, and 123 extra coins are obtained. FIG. 18 shows a case where the reels 110 to 112 are started based on the start lever operation (start operation) and freeze occurs, and the freeze ends after a predetermined time t1. 18, time point a-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point a-2 is the time point during the freeze after the start operation, time point a-3 is the time point when the operation navigation is started, time point a-4 is the time point when the freeze ends, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted for operation, time point a-5 is the start time for the cross button 191 to be accepted, time point a-6 is the time point of the first stop operation, time point a-7 is the time point of the second stop operation, and time point a-8 is. The time point a-9 of the third stop operation is the time point when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 18, first, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating based on the start operation (see time a-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the effect image display device 157 displays an image in which the lord looks disappointed (see time a-1 in the lower row). In other words, although the game is actually frozen, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate and the performance image display device 157 displays an image that you are regretting, so that the player can be misled that the freeze is not occurring. Next, at time a-2 during freezing, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, but none of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the effect button 191 and the cross button 192 can be operated (see time a-2 in the upper row). Therefore, setting operations such as volume setting and light intensity setting are also impossible during the freeze. In addition, the effect image display device 157 displays an image indicating that the game is frozen and button operation is disabled (see time point a-2 in the lower row).

Next, at time a-3, operation navigation is started although it is frozen (see time a-3 in the upper row), and an image of operation navigation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time a-3 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 18, since the pressing order Bell_LCR is won, specifically, the number 123 indicating the LCR operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, when the freeze ends at time a-4, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be stopped (see time a-4 in the upper row), and when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time a-6 in the upper row), the left reel 110 stops, and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image after the first stop operation (see time a-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, after the second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point a-7 in the upper row), and the third stop operation is performed on the stop button 139 (see time point a-8 in the upper row), at time a-9, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time point a-9 in the upper and lower rows), and an effect image indicating the number of additional reels is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point a-9 in the lower row). Specifically, in the game shown in FIG. 18, 123 cards are added based on the 123 numbers notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 18, immediately after the start operation, the player misunderstands that the freeze has not occurred, and thereafter, by operating the operation means such as the stop button 138 (since the operation is not accepted even if operated), the player recognizes that the freeze is in progress. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a surprise, and to improve the sense of anticipation of the addition. Further, since the operation navigation is executed after the freeze and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Further, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is in the unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent the stop button 138 from being erroneously operated.

FIG. 19 shows a game in which the pressing order bell_RLC is won in the specialized zone, the RLC operation is performed, the lower bell is won, and 231 extra coins are obtained. FIG. 19 shows a case where freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the reels 110 to 112 are waiting for the start of rotation, and after a predetermined time t2 (>predetermined time t1), the freezing ends and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In FIG. 19, time point b-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point b-2 is the time point during the freeze after the start operation and the start time point when the operation of the effect button 192 can be accepted, time point b-3 is the time point after the time point b-2 and the operation of the effect button 192 can not be accepted, time point b-4 is the end point of the freeze, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, operation of the cross button 191 and the effect button 192 can be accepted, and time point b-. Reference numeral 5 denotes a start point at which operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, a point at which operation navigation is started, a point b-6 at the first stop operation, a point b-7 at the second stop operation, a point b-8 at the third stop operation, and a point b-9 at which all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 19, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a wait state (see time point b-1 in the upper and lower stages), and the first button operation promotion effect is executed, and the initial image d21 of the first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point b-1 in the lower stage). The first button operation prompting effect is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 (for example, the effect image display device 157 displays the image of the meter and a message such as ``Collect the meter by repeatedly hitting the button!''), and is an effect that ends after the lapse of time. It should be noted that, at time point b-1, it is not possible to accept an operation for the effect button 192 (see time point b-1 in the upper row).

Next, at the time point b-2, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the effect button 192 (see time point b-2 in the upper row), and when the effect button 192 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the first button operation promotion effect image d22 (see time point b-2 in the lower row). The image d22 includes an image indicating an operation prompt (for example, an image prompting button operation with a message such as "Pump the button repeatedly to fill up the meter!"), an image indicating an operation response (for example, an image in which the value of the meter increases in response to the operation of the effect button 192), and an image indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 192 (for example, an image of a gauge indicating the effective time of the operation of the effect button 192).

Here, since the first button operation promoting performance is a performance that ends based on the lapse of a predetermined time, there is a problem that the player tends to overlook it compared to the performance that does not end based on the lapse of the predetermined time. However, in the present embodiment, since the first button operation promotion performance is executed during freezing, the player does not overlook the first button operation promotion performance, and the player can be made to concentrate on the first button operation promotion performance.

That is, during the execution of the first button operation promoting effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, operation of the cross button 191, operation of the start lever 135, operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so the player can concentrate on the first button operation promoting effect without overlooking the first button operation promoting effect.

Next, at time point b-3, when it becomes impossible to accept the operation of the effect button 192 again (see time point b-3 in the upper row), the second button operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the image d23 of the second button operation promotion effect (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The second button operation promotion effect is an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 again (for example, the effect image display device 157 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect button 192 together with the image of the full meter). The second button operation promotion effect is an effect that does not end with the lapse of time, and is an effect that ends when the effect button 192 is operated.

Next, at time point b-4, the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the operation of the effect button 192 can be accepted, and the effect button 192 is operated (see time point b-4 in the upper and lower stages). Specifically, in the game shown in FIG. 19, an image showing 231 additional cards is displayed based on the number 231 notified by the operation navigation to be executed thereafter.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 192 whose operation is prompted by the second button operation promoting effect started in the freeze state is started after the freeze state ends. In this embodiment, two button operation promoting performances (a first button operation promoting performance and a second button operation promoting performance) are started during freezing, so there is a risk that the frozen state will be prolonged and the performance will become redundant. Therefore, the second button operation promotion performance executed after the first button operation promotion performance is started during the freeze, but the operation effective period of the performance button 192 to be operated is started after the freeze is finished. This prevents the freeze state from prolonging and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation prompting effect.

Next, at time point b-5, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and operation navigation is started (see time point b-5 in the upper row). In the game shown in FIG. 19, since the pressing order Bell_RLC is won, specifically, the number 231 indicating the RLC operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-6 in the upper row), the right reel 112 stops, and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image d11 after the first stop operation (see time point b-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, the second stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-7 in the upper stage), and the third stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point b-8 in the upper stage).

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 19, the freeze occurs at the same time as the start operation, so it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of cards will be increased in the game. In addition, since the number of additional coins is notified after the freeze, and operation navigation is executed after that, the player can grasp the content of the correct stop operation from the notified number of additional coins. Further, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is in the unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent the stop button 138 from being erroneously operated.

FIG. 20 shows a game in which the pressing order bell _RCL is won in the special zone, the RCL operation is performed, the lower bell is won, and 321 extra coins are obtained. FIG. 20 shows a case where freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the reels 110 to 112 are waiting for the start of rotation, and after a predetermined time t3 (>predetermined time t2), the freezing ends and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In FIG. 20, time point c-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point c-2 is the time point during the freeze after the start operation and the start time point when the operation of the effect button 192 can be accepted, time point c-3 is the time point after time point c-2, the time point when the operation reception of the effect button 192 is disabled, operation navigation is started, time point c-4 is the time point of the end of freezing, the time point when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and the stop button 137 to 139 operation is not accepted. Time point c-5 is the time point when the operation of the cross button 191 can be accepted, time point c-6 is the time point of the first stop operation, time point c-7 is the time point of the second stop operation, time point c-8 is the time point of the third stop operation, and time point c-9 is the time point when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 20, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a wait state (see time point c-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the effect image display device 157 displays an initial image d31 (for example, an image of a boss and a samurai facing each other) (see time point c-1 in the lower row). The image d32 includes an image indicating operation promotion (e.g., an image prompting button operation with the words "Determine with a single blow!") and an image indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 192 (e.g., an image of a gauge indicating the time during which the operation of the effect button 192 is valid). The first button operation prompting effect is an operation prompting effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 192, and is an effect that ends with the lapse of time. It should be noted that, at time point c-1, it is not possible to accept an operation for the effect button 192 (see time point c-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time point c-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation for the effect button 192 (see time point c-2 in the upper row). The effect image display device 157 displays the image d32 of the first button operation promotion effect (see point c-2 in the lower part).

Here, since the first button operation promoting performance is a performance that ends based on the lapse of a predetermined time, there is a problem that the player tends to overlook it compared to the performance that does not end based on the lapse of the predetermined time. However, in the present embodiment, since the first button operation promotion performance is executed during freezing, the player does not overlook the first button operation promotion performance, and the player can be made to concentrate on the first button operation promotion performance.

That is, during the execution of the first button operation promoting effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, operation of the cross button 191, operation of the start lever 135, operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so the player can concentrate on the first button operation promoting effect without overlooking the first button operation promoting effect.

Next, at time point c-3, when operation of the effect button 192 becomes disabled (see time point c-3 in the upper row), operation navigation is started (see time point c-3 in the upper row), and an image d11 of operation navigation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point c-3 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 20, since the pressing order Bell_RCL is won, specifically, the number 321 indicating the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In other words, the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 20 is an effect that is started during the freeze, and is also an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139, so it can be said to be the second button operation promotion effect. This second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) is a effect that does not end with the lapse of time, and is an effect that ends when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated.

Next, at point c-4, when the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be stopped (see point c-4 in the upper and lower stages). At point c-5, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the cross button 191 (see point c-5 in the upper stage).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation effective period of the stop buttons 137 to 139 whose operation is prompted by the second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) started in the freeze state is started after the freeze state ends. In this embodiment, two button operation promoting performances (a first button operation promoting performance and a second button operation promoting performance) are started during freezing, so there is a risk that the frozen state will be prolonged and the performance will become redundant. Therefore, the second button operation promotion performance executed after the first button operation promotion performance is started during the freeze, but the operation effective period of the performance button 192 to be operated is started after the freeze is finished. This prevents the freeze state from prolonging and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation prompting effect.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 139, the right reel 112 is stopped (see time point c-6 in the upper row), and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image d11 after the first stop operation (see time point c-6 in the lower row).

Next, after the second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point c-7 in the upper stage), and the third stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point c-8 in the upper stage), at time point c-9, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time point c-9 in the upper and lower stages), and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional reels is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point c-9 in the lower stage). In the game shown in FIG. 20, specifically, 321 cards are added based on the 321 numbers notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 20, since the freeze occurs with the start operation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of cards will be increased in the game. Further, since the operation navigation is executed after the freeze and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Further, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is in the unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent the stop button 138 from being erroneously operated.

19 and 20, the first button operation prompting effect described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 192. However, regardless of whether or not the effect button 192 is operated or the number of times, it is an effect that ends based on the lapse of a predetermined time. On the other hand, the second button operation prompting effect (operation navigation) described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 is a effect that does not end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, the first button operation prompting effect has a special feeling compared to the second button operation prompting effect, and the interest in the game can be improved. However, there is a concern that the first button operation prompting performance that ends based on the passage of time is likely to be overlooked by the player, so in this embodiment, the first button operation prompting performance is executed during freezing to draw attention to the first button operation prompting performance.

In addition, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the volume setting can be performed (the cross button 191 can be accepted) except during the freeze period, but the volume setting can be performed (the cross button 191 cannot be accepted) even during a game such as when the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the volume setting can be performed (the cross button 191 can be accepted) during a non-game period in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

<Overview of Embodiment A>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, embodiment A),
A game progress means (for example, the main control unit 300) that progresses the game;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) that executes production based on instructions from the game progress means;
A gaming machine equipped with operation means (for example, production button 192, information display button 191, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.) that can be operated by a player,
The game progress means is
It is possible to generate a freeze state that waits for the progress of the game (for example, the freeze of FIGS. 18 to 20),
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a first operation promotion effect (for example, the first button operation promotion effect in FIG. 19 (b-2) and FIG. 20 (c-2)) that may end when a predetermined time elapses,
After the freeze state is started by the game progression means, the first operation promotion effect may be started (for example, FIG. 19 (b-2), FIG. 20 (c-2)).
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, since the first operation promoting performance which may be terminated based on the lapse of a predetermined time in the freeze state is executed, the first operation promoting performance can be noticed without overlooking the first operation promoting performance, and the player can have a special feeling.

In the first basic configuration,
The production control means is
Means for terminating the first operation promotion effect started in the frozen state in the frozen state,
This is referred to as preferred configuration 1.

According to the preferred configuration 1, the first operation promoting performance started in the frozen state ends in the frozen state, so that the first operation promoting performance can be made to pay attention to without overlooking the first operation promoting performance, and the player can have a special feeling.

In a first basic configuration, preferred configuration 1,
The operation means includes a first operation means (for example, effect button 192 etc.) capable of changing the effect being executed based on the operation,
The first operation promotion effect is
A production prompting the operation of the first operation means,
This is referred to as preferred configuration 2.

According to the preferred configuration 2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first operation promoting effect that prompts the operation of the first operating means, and to make the player feel special.
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a second operation promotion effect (for example, the second button operation promotion effect in FIG. 19 (b-3) and FIG. 20 (c-3)) that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time,
The production control means is
After the first operation promoting effect started after the freeze state is started, the second operation promoting effect may be started in the frozen state (for example, FIG. 19 (b-3), FIG. 20 (c-3)).
This is referred to as preferred configuration 3.

According to the preferred configuration 3, the second operation promoting performance that never ends is executed based on the lapse of the predetermined time in the frozen state, so that the second operation promoting performance can be noticed without overlooking the second operation promoting performance, and the player can have a special feeling.

In preferred configuration 3,
The second operation promotion effect is
An effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means (for example, FIG. 19 (b-3)),
This is referred to as preferred configuration 4.

According to the preferred configuration 4, since two operation prompting effects for prompting the operation of the same operation means are continuously executed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for the game.

In preferred configuration 3,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) operated to start rotation of the plurality of reels;
further comprising
The operation means includes a second operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that receives a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The second operation promotion effect is
An effect that prompts the stop operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 20 (c-3)),
This is referred to as preferred configuration 5.

According to the preferred configuration 5, since two operation prompting effects for prompting the operation of different operation means are successively executed, it is possible to prompt the progress of the game and improve the expectation for the game.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, embodiment A),
Lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery processing) for determining the propriety of winning a plurality of types of combinations by lottery;
game state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing) for controlling the transition of the game state;
Effect execution means (eg, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, effect image display device 157, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The game state transition means, when the first transition condition is satisfied in the first state (non-accompaniment state) in the first period (e.g., advantageous section normal state) (e.g., when winning a weak cherry or a strong cherry and winning in the accompanying lottery process, Fig. 10 (a)), means to shift to a second state (e.g., princess accompanying state).
The second state when the first combination (e.g., weak cherry or strong cherry) is won by the lottery means is more advantageous than the first state when the first combination is won by the lottery means (e.g., CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)),
When the first role is won in the second state of the first period, the effect executing means executes a first suggestive effect suggesting that the first role has been won (e.g., corresponding role winning notification effect, image d3 in FIG. 12(b)).
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, a player who does not know that the second state is an advantageous state when winning the first role can be given a special feeling by executing the first suggestion performance when winning the first role, and can suggest that the second state is an advantageous state when winning the first role. In addition, for the player who knows that the second state is an advantageous state if he/she wins the first role, by executing the first suggestion performance when winning the first role, the player does not miss the fact that the player has won the first role and can make them feel excited.

In a second basic configuration,
Said game state transition means, when a second transition condition is established in said first state of said first period (for example, when winning a watermelon or chance and winning in accompanying lottery processing, FIG. 10 (a)), means to shift to a third state (for example, accompanying state),
The third state when the second role (e.g., watermelon or chance eye) is won by the lottery means is more advantageous than the first state when the second role is won by the lottery means (e.g., CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)),
When the second role is won in the third state of the first period, the effect execution means executes a second suggestion effect that suggests that the second role has been won (e.g., corresponding role winning notification effect, image d5 in FIG. 13 (a)). On the other hand, if the second role is won in the first state of the first period, the second suggestion effect is not executed.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 11.

According to the preferred configuration 11, a player who does not know that the third state is an advantageous state when winning the second role can be given a special feeling by executing the second suggestive performance when winning the second role, and it is possible to suggest that the third state is an advantageous state if the second role is won. In addition, for the player who knows that the third state is an advantageous state when winning the second role, by executing the second suggestion performance when winning the second role, the player can be made excited by not overlooking the fact that the player has won the second role.

In preferred configuration 11,
Said game state transition means, when a third transition condition is satisfied in said second state of said first period (for example, when winning a watermelon or chance and winning in accompanying lottery processing, FIG. 10 (a)), means to shift to a fourth state (for example, old man & princess accompanying state),
The fourth state when the first role is won by the lottery means is more advantageous than the second state when the first role is won by the lottery means (for example, CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)),
The effect execution means, when the first role is won in the fourth state of the first period, a third suggestion effect suggesting that the first role has been won (for example, corresponding role winning notification effect, images d3 and d5 in FIG. 13(a)).
This is referred to as preferred configuration 12 .

According to the preferred configuration 12, a player who does not know that winning the first role in the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state can be given a special feeling by executing the third suggestive performance when the player wins the first role, and can suggest that the fourth state is in an advantageous state if the player wins the first role. In addition, for the player who knows that winning the first role in the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state, the third suggesting performance is executed when the player wins the first role, so that the player does not miss the winning of the first role and is excited.

The third condition may be the same as the second condition.

In preferred configuration 12,
The first state is a state in which neither the first character image (eg, princess image) nor the second character image (eg, grandfather image) is displayed (eg, FIG. 9(a)),
The second state is a state in which the first character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 9(b)),
The third state is a state in which the second character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 9(c)),
The fourth state is a state in which both the first character image and the second character image are displayed (for example, FIG. 9(d)),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 13.

According to the preferred configuration 13, the player can clearly determine each state in the first period from the character image.

In preferred configurations 12 or 13,
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to the second state when a first drop condition is satisfied in the fourth state of the first period (for example, when winning in a lottery for the end of the accompaniment after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed),
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to the third state when a second fall condition is satisfied in the fourth state during the first period (for example, when winning a lottery to end the princess accompanying the princess after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed),
The game state transition means is means for transitioning to the first state when the second fall condition is satisfied in the second state of the first period,
The game state transition means is means for transitioning to the first state when the first fall condition is satisfied in the third state of the first period,
This is referred to as preferred configuration 14 .

According to the preferred configuration 14, there may be transitions from favorable conditions to unfavorable conditions, thereby providing the player with a more exciting, tense and interesting game.

In preferred configurations 11, 12, 13 or 14,
comprising a second period (e.g., CZ) different from the first period;
In the second period, the second state may occur,
In the second period, the third state may occur,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration 15.

According to the preferred configuration 15, even in the second period different from the first period, the game transitions to the second state or the third state, so that the variety of games can be provided to the player and the interest can be improved.

In addition, a third role (for example, a push order bell) that is different from both the first role and the second role is provided,
In the second period, the second state or the third state when the third role is won by the lottery means is given the first privilege (for example, the probability of winning AT shift is increased),
In the first period, the second state when winning the first role by the lottery means or the third state when winning the second role by the lottery means may be given a second privilege (for example, the winning probability of CZ shift is increased).

According to this configuration, even if the state is the same, the conditions for granting the privilege are different and the privilege is also different when the period is different, so it is possible to provide a variety of performances and games.

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals (hereinafter also referred to as game value), and the input of game value involves inputting electronic data from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device with a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals or the number of won medals by an electronic method). , and the payout of gaming value includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the scope of the present invention, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the invention, and the actions and effects of the invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the invention.

[Embodiment B]
<<Embodiment 1>>
A gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 21 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 (door body) attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Note that the front door 102 (door body) will be described later with reference to FIG. 22 .

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are accommodated in the center inside (not shown) of the main body 101, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 (see FIG. 24(a)). The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from a symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (also called an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light blocking piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress (special game state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp for notifying the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role which is one of the winning roles in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. On the left side of the medal slot 141, there are arranged a cross key 193a (second operating means, consisting of four buttons, an up button, a down button, a right button, and a left button) and an OK button 193b (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "cross button 193"), which are operating means for selecting menus, adjusting volume, etc., on a management screen SD, a volume value display VD, etc., which will be described later.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payout display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 (operating means) is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), the next stop operation will be referred to as second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation will be referred to as third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

If the left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is indicated by "center or C", and the right stop button 139 is indicated by "right or R", the order of operation (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: (1) left→middle→right operation order (left center right or LCR); (2) left→right→middle operation order (left center right or LRC); (4) Middle→Right→Left operation order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center operation order (Right Left Center or RLC), and (6) Right→Center→Left operation order (Right Center Left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

The effect device 160 is provided with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means, hereinafter also referred to as “effect image display device”) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player).

The display means does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device capable of displaying various effects images and various game information. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position not overlapping with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below the main control board storage case 210. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (first operation means, also referred to as “setting key SW”, not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. The setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change or confirm settings of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later. Further, inside the body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as a “reset SW”) is provided that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing the switch. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state. In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 32) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although the details will be described later, when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and when the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower surface plate 264. A power supply device 252 having a power supply board is arranged above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later. Furthermore, it has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off.

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. - 特許庁

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 .

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102 .

An optical sensor (detection means, hereinafter also referred to as an "open/close sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101, and a light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) indicating the closed detection state to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high level signal) indicating an open detection state to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is closed, the detection state is the closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is the open state, the detection state is the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, and may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, and the like. Further, the open detection state and the closed detection state are not necessarily switched with opening and closing of the door body, and the detection state may be changed to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state, or conversely, the detection state may be changed to the open detection state even if the door body is in the closed state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like to block the light from the light projecting portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, so that the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is open.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

Above the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. Below the pattern display window 113, a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals or the like onto a medal tray 161 are provided. Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181 .

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control section 300 that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control section 400.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, stop positions of reels, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A DT (watch dog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (assuming that this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. start the main control unit main processing).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value thus acquired as an initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed for random values, or to determine the reading start position of the random number table.

The main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medals paid out from the medal payout device 180 at each interrupt time. (medal payout sensor, optical sensor of reel 110, optical sensor of reel 111, optical sensor of reel 112, open/close sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the open/close sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the open/close state of the front door (door body) 102 . When the front door 102 is closed, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the door is closed. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high-level signal) indicating an open detection state to the CPU 304 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 for driving the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, and the game medal insertion lamp 1). 29 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 (an external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the sub-controller 400 , it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-controller 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 through an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. . The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-controller 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 and an effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 156 are connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 performs various controls of the production device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157 . The second sub-controller 500 may be composed of a plurality of controllers, such as a controller that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a controller that controls various driving devices for effects (for example, a controller that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-controller 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on this control command. is equipped with The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 24(a). In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece of the left reel 110 has a "replay" pattern, the number 0 piece of the middle reel 111 has a "bell" pattern, and the right reel 112 has a number 2 piece has a "watermelon" pattern.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 24(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning hands in the present embodiment, the big bonuses (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are roles that transition to a bonus game, and the replay (replay) is a role that can be played again without inserting new medals. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a replay.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay combinations. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "white 7-white 7-white 7" for BB1 and "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in the game, the flag indicating internal winning is maintained until they are won, and BB1 and BB2 are internally won even after the next game, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 corresponds to BB2. The symbol combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "Bonus-Bonus-Bonus". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game) (details will be described later), the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that the regular bonus game is started after the big bonus game is started, and the next regular bonus game is immediately started when one regular bonus game is finished, without the start condition being that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won or that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 should be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

A "replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based game state (hereinafter also referred to as a "normal game state") that is initially set immediately after power-on of the slot machine 100, and is a game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player compared to other game states.

In this example, in the low replay probability state (RT1), when a replay combination 2 (promoted replay 1) or a replay combination 3 (promoted replay 2) is won, the state shifts to a replay high probability state (RT2) to be described later. Also, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a special combination is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Replay High Probability State (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when a special combination is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT3)>
A special combination internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which an internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination is set to ON, and is a game state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed by a player's stop operation at a predetermined timing.

In this example, when a special role is won in this special role internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In this example, in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered.

In this example, the condition for ending the special game state (RT4) is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a case where a predetermined win is internally won, a predetermined number of wins (e.g., 8 times), or a predetermined number of times (e.g., 6 times) of games are played.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main processing of the main control unit according to the control program pre-stored in the ROM 306 .

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although the details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial setting, setting change, recovery process, and the like are performed.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, the presence or absence of insertion of medals is checked, and preparations are made to transmit an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-controller 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, and a replay state is entered, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, an internal winning combination lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery processing, a winning combination lottery table stored in a ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result of the internal lottery to the first sub-control part 400.例文帳に追加As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In reel stop control processing, it is possible to accept stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pushed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to stop one of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawing frames set in the stop table in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pushed stop button. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a stop button reception command related to the stopped stop buttons 137 to 139 for each stop operation (more specifically, a stop button reception 1 command for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 2 command for the second stop operation, and a stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for each reel stop, a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, and a stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) Preparations are made to transmit a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation and a reel stop 3 command for the third stop operation to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S109, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small winning combination (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting processing>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, initialization is performed at startup. In the initialization at startup, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition setting, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314 and initial value setting, etc. are performed.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening), and if the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204, and if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process. In step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process.

In the recovery process of step S205, after executing the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power interruption (for example, restoring the recovery data saved in the RAM 308 in the power interruption process of step S411 of the main controller timer interrupt process), the initial setting process ends.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Although the details will be described later, in this setting change processing, processing related to setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, the initialization process is finished after executing the process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) and the like.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, the data in the RAM 308 is initialized (RAM clear), and in the next step S302, preparations are made to send a setting change start command indicating to start setting change to the first sub-controller 400. When receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set during setting change. As a result, in the various game processes in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the process corresponding to the setting change is executed.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated, and if it has been operated, the current set value is changed, and if it has not been operated, the processing of step S305 is repeatedly executed until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in step S307.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time the operation of the reset switch is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, the set value is reset to 1. By repeating this process, the set value is changed. If it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation of changing the set value by the reset SW is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored as a new setting value in the RAM 308 (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is received. However, it may be configured such that the set value is determined only when the front door 102 is in the open state by adding a determination process as to whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeated. In step S311, preparations are made to transmit a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment).

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S402, the WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt), so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected).

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the signals are stored in the signal state storage areas provided separately for each sensor 318 in the RAM 308. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>406 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control part 400, it is possible to determine the performance control according to the change of the game control in the main control part 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and to determine the performance control contents based on the information of the command data included in the output schedule information.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this device monitoring process, set value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 is set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S411, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the main control unit returns to the main processing.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, after the set value confirmation process is performed, the process proceeds to step S502. Although the details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation processing, processing related to setting confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, stores closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308, and prepares to transmit a door closure detection command indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the door closing detection command is received from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 stores closing detection information indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "closed" and date and time of closing) in the RAM 408 as historical information in chronological order.

On the other hand, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating an open detection state, stores open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308, and prepares to transmit a door open detection command indicating that opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 stores open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "open" and date and time of opening) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and performs door open notification.

The door opening notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "Door is open"). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "Door is being opened" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement processing, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the valid period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the start lever 135 is operated), and when a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, the main control unit 300 performs processing for settlement of the electronically accumulated medals and transmits a settlement command indicating that the medal settlement processing has been executed to the first sub-control unit 400. prepare for

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processes, the device monitoring process ends. Although the details will be described later, in the other device monitoring process, an error notification start process, an error notification end process, and the like are performed.

<Setting value confirmation processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing described with reference to FIG. 29 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being checked. If the set value is being checked, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being checked, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the setting value confirmation valid period, and if it is the setting value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not a MAX bet state (a state in which the number of medals that can start one game (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and an error is not being reported.

It should be noted that the conditions regarding the setting value confirmation effective period may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions, instead of all of the above conditions.

At step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made to send a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When receiving this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S606 during setting confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is terminated to continue setting confirmation, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value, and in the next step S608, preparations are made to transmit a setting confirmation end command indicating to end setting confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error is detected. If not, the other device monitoring process ends, and if each error is detected, the process advances to step S702.

Here, errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment include door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion errors 2 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM error, winning error, and the like.

A door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened (error detection state), and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed (error non-detection state).

As described above, in the door open monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating a closed detection state, transmits a door closing detection command to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the closing detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closing) in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order. 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the opening detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and notifies the door of opening.

A hopper empty error is a payout error relating to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a specified number (error detection state), and is resolved by replenishing the hopper with the specified number or more of medals (error non-detection state).

Medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error) occurs when the inserted medals stay in the medal selector or the like (error detection state), and after removing the cause of the error, it is canceled (error non-detection state) when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is received. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number (error detection state), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (error non-detection state).

Medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on (becomes an error detection state) while the medal insertion processing is not in progress. Medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medals do not pass through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 normally (becomes an error detection state).

Medal payout error 1 occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time while the medal payout device is in operation (error detection state), medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is in operation (error detection state), and medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on (becomes error detection state) other than during medal payout processing. Then, the problem is solved (the error non-detection state is established) when the operation of the reset switch is received.

An overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box turns on (becomes an error detection state). After removing the cause of the error, the error release switch (
In this example, the error is resolved (an error non-detection state is established) when an operation of the reset switch is received. A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (becomes an error detection state), and is resolved when an operation of an error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted (becomes an error non-detection state). The winning abnormality occurs when a winning pattern different from the winning determined by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state), and is canceled (error non-detection state) when the operation of an error release switch (reset SW in this example) is received.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, a lower tray full error, a payout device error, an overpayment error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, a frame opening error, a RAM clear error, a shock sensor error, etc. These errors are also eliminated when the operation of the error cancellation switch is accepted after the cause of the error has been eliminated.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error reportable period, and if it is not an error reportable period, the process proceeds to other device monitoring processing, and if it is an error reportable period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error reportable period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If not, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S704, error notification start processing is executed.

In this error notification start process, the main control section 300 displays an error code on the payout number indicator 127 and prepares for transmitting an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control section 400 . When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main controller 300, it executes processing to start error notification.

Error notification will be described later, but in this example, when a selector error occurs, the character string "Selector error has occurred!" and the character string "Please call the game clerk." output. The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112).

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (door is open). If the door is open, the other device monitoring process is terminated. If the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the error notification end condition is satisfied. If the error notification end condition is not satisfied, the other device monitoring process is terminated, and if the error notification end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S707.

Here, the error notification termination condition is a condition that is met when an error cancellation operation (in this example, an operation to turn on the reset SW) is received in an error non-detection state.

In step S707, error notification end processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the main control section 300 erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 and prepares for transmitting an error elimination command corresponding to the eliminated error to the first sub-control section 400. - 特許庁When receiving this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the error notification that is being executed.

In step S708, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is OFF, other device monitoring processing is terminated to continue displaying the management screen. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the main control unit 300 prepares to send a preparation screen display command to the first sub-control unit 400 to instruct the start of display of the preparation screen (see, for example, FIG. 36(A)(4)). When the first sub-controller 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main controller 300, the first sub-controller 400 displays the preparation screen until the management screen can be displayed, or displays the preparation screen for a predetermined time even if the management screen can be displayed.

<Management screen>
Next, the management screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 38. FIG.

Here, the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a store clerk of a game parlor to make various settings related to the slot machine 100 . The display contents of the administrator screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B can be displayed.

The administrator screen SD of this example is composed of a title display of "system settings" indicating that it is a screen for administrator and a plurality of types of menu displays. The menu display in this example includes power saving setting, time setting, error history setting, and setting history, and an administrator such as a game shop clerk can arbitrarily select any item on the menu display by operating the cross key 193a (up key, down key, right key, left key) and the OK button 193b described with reference to FIG.

For example, when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, the volume setting of the speakers 272 and 277 and the simple setting of the brightness of LEDs and various lamps), etc. When the time setting item is selected, the date and time can be set.

In addition, when an error history item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to display the history of errors that have occurred in the past at the game machine, the opening/closing history of the front door 102, the history of power on/recovery, etc. When the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations. The opening/closing history of the front door 102 and the setting history in the error history will be described later.

Items that can be selected on the administrator screen SD are not limited to this example, and for example, it may be possible to set the maximum volume that can be set only by the administrator of the amusement arcade, an error sound to be output when an error (for example, opening the front door 102) occurs, or the like, or to set the light intensity of LEDs and various lamps.

Next, before describing the management screen SD, terms used in the subsequent drawings will be described with reference to FIG. 32(A).

"Power supply state" indicates the state of power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, "power OFF" is the state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, and "power ON" is the state in which power is supplied to the slot machine 100.

"Reel operating state" indicates the operating state of the reels 110 to 112, "stopped" is a state in which all of the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and "operating" is a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating, and is synonymous with "rotating".

The "door closed state/door open state" indicates the state of the front door 102, the "door closed state" is the state in which the front door 102 is closed, and the "door open state" is the state in which the front door 102 is opened. The "closed detection state/open detection state" indicates the state of the open/close sensor. The "closed detection state" is the state in which the front door 102 is detected to be in the closed state, or the state in which the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor is forced to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation.

"Non-inserted state/inserted state" indicates whether or not medals are inserted, "non-inserted state" is a state in which medals are not inserted, and "inserted state" is a state in which medals are inserted or a replay state due to replay winning. "Error detected state" indicates whether or not an error is detected, "error non-detected state" indicates a state in which no error is detected, and "error detected state" indicates a state in which an error is detected.

"Setting key SW" indicates the state of the setting key SW, "ON" indicates that the setting key SW is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the setting key SW is OFF. "Reset SW" indicates the state of the reset SW, "ON" indicates that the reset SW is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the reset SW is OFF.

"Start lever" indicates the state of the start lever 135, "ON" indicates that the start lever 135 is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the start lever 135 is OFF. "Stop button" indicates the state of the stop buttons 137 to 139, "non-operated" indicates the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and "stop operated" indicates the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated. "Cross button" indicates the state of the cross button 193, "non-operation" is the state in which the cross button 193 is not operated, and "specific operation" is the state in which the cross button 193 is operated.

"Luminous body" indicates the operation state of the light emitting means (in this example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), "light off" is the state in which the light emitting means is off, "open light emitting mode" is the state in which the light emitting means is emitting light in an open light emitting mode indicating that the front door 102 is open, and "light emitting mode during stop" is a light emitting mode during stop indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. This is a state in which the light emitting means is emitting light.

"Output sound" indicates the operating state of the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example), "Non-output" indicates a state in which no sound is output from the sound output means, "Setting change sound" indicates a state in which the sound output means outputs a setting change sound indicating that the setting is being changed, "Opening sound" indicates a state in which the sound output means outputs an opening sound indicating that the front door 102 is open, and "Stopping BGM" indicates sound output. This is a state in which the stopping BGM indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are being stopped is output from the means. "Display example" indicates an example of display contents displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. FIG.

<Setting change mode>
Next, the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIG. 32(A). FIG. 32A is a diagram showing the flow of the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Turn on the setting key SW in the setting change mode/power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 32(A)(1) is a state in which the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the open/close sensor is in an open detection state, and the setting key SW is turned ON by an operation (some operation) that turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON.

In this state, since the power supply is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output no sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) does not display.

<Setting change mode/starting setting change mode, displaying management screen>
The state shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B is a state in which the power switch is operated by the manager of the game parlor while the setting key SW is ON, and the power state changes from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on in a state in which an operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, and in this state, the slot machine 100 shifts to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) and outputs a setting change sound from sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 32(A)(2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Furthermore, the slot machine 100 is configured to be able to start displaying a management screen (management display) when an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state.

More specifically, in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 26, the main control unit 300 starts the setting change process described with reference to FIG. 27 when it determines that the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON.

Subsequently, in step S302 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start setting change to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen when receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(A)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a. In this example, the current setting value is setting 6. Therefore, as shown in FIG.

<Setting change mode/change of set value>
The state shown in FIG. 32(A)(3) is a state in which the reset SW has been operated once by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 updates the currently set set values 1 to 6 by adding 1 each time the reset switch operation is detected once, and returns the set value to 1 when the set value exceeds 6, thereby changing the set value. In this example, since the reset switch operation is detected once, the set value display device 101a indicates setting 1 as shown in FIG. 32(A)(3). Display the number 1.

<Setting change mode/Set value confirmation>
The state shown in FIG. 32(A)(4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the administrator of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

When determining that the start lever 135 has been operated in step S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 stores (confirms) the set value displayed on the set value display device 101a as a new set value, erases the display of the set value display device 101a, and hides the set value in subsequent steps S308 and S309. , the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased.

<End of setting change mode/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 32(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

When the main control unit 300 determines in step S310 of the setting change process that the setting key SW is OFF, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-control unit 400, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing for ending display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Setting confirmation mode>
Next, the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 32(B). FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door closed state>
The state shown in FIG. 32(B)(1) is a state in which the power state is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor is in the state of detection of closing, and the stop effect is being executed.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during stop, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the effect during stop.

<Setting confirmation mode/front door: door closed state → door open state)>
The state shown in FIG. 32(B)(2) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door body closed state described with reference to FIG.

In this state, since the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the opening sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

<Setting confirmation mode/power ON, front door (door body open state), setting key SW ON>
The state shown in FIG. 32(B)(3) is a state in which the power supply state shown in FIG. 32(B)(2) is the power ON, the front door 102 is in the door open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor, and the setting key SW is turned ON.

Since the slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on, the slot machine 100 shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed in the same state.

Further, the slot machine 100 is configured to be able to start displaying the management screen SD (management display) when an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state).

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting key SW is ON, and the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen when this setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(B)(3), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Setting confirmation mode / end of setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 32(B)(4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process that the setting key SW is OFF, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation end command indicating to end setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(B)(4), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Display example 1 of management screen>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 33A(1) to 33(A)(3) is the same state as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 32(B)(1) to 32(B)(3), and is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON by the manager of the amusement arcade when the power is ON, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the open/close sensor is in an open detection state, and the display of the management screen SD is started.

33(A)(1) to 33(A)(2), the front door 102 is in the door open state, so in addition to (or instead of) executing the stop performance in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), an open notification (for example, an image including a character string "the door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state may be displayed. example).

<Management screen display example 1/open/close sensor: open detection state → closed detection state>
The state shown in FIG. 33(A)(4) is a state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forced to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode.

The slot machine 100 is configured to continue displaying the management screen SD (management display) even when the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed.

More specifically, in steps S601 and S606 of the setting value confirmation processing described with reference to FIG. 30, if the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the main control unit 300 ends the setting value confirmation processing and continues the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 33(A)(4), the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the open/close sensor is the closed detection state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) that emit light in the open state are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that output the opening sound is set to non-output.

<Management screen display example 1/Exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 33(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

When the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process described using FIG.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 33(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the reels 110 to 1 are displayed as a normal effect.
12 start the performance to be executed during the stop.

<Management screen display example 1/Turn on the setting key SW with the open/close sensor (closed detection state)>
33(A)(6) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the amusement arcade, and the setting key SW is turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured such that when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the closed detection state, even if an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) cannot be started.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the subsequent processing of step S604 is not executed, so the set value is not displayed on the set value display device 101a. Also, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, so as shown in FIG.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21), detection means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 21) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, and a certain operation (for example, turning from OFF to ON by rotating. a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of patterns; and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, wherein the detection means changes the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is closed. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and the detection means is configured to change the detection state of the detection means to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation related to the detection means (for example, an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape or the like). When the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the display of the management display can be started, and the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed in the first state and the reel is rotating, and the first state, the reel rotating state, and the certain operation are performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop state (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started, even if the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the display of the management display cannot be started, and in the state where the management display is displayed, the detection state of the detection device changes from the open detection state to the open detection state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display of the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIGS. 33(A)(4)) is continued even when the closed state is detected.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are rotating or medals are being bet), there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed. Therefore, even if the door is open, the display for management is not displayed while the reels are rotating, thereby improving security. Further, for example, even if a fraudulent person performs a predetermined operation to open the door body while the detection state of the detection means remains in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed, thereby improving security. After the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in a closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine which is convenient for the game clerk.

In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (replay)) by the stop button, the management display may not start to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in the stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is being played and the management display cannot be started, thereby improving security.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen>
Next, display example 2 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 33B(1) to 33B(3) is the same state as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 32B(1) to 32(B)(3), and is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON by the manager of the amusement arcade when the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the open/close sensor is in an open detection state, and the display of the management screen SD is started. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Management screen display example 2/Power status: Power ON → Power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 33(B)(4) is a state where the power state shown in FIG. 33(B)(3) is the power ON state, and the power switch is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade, and the power state changes from power ON to power OFF.

In this state, since the power supply is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output no sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) does not display.

<Management screen display example 2/setting key SW: ON→OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 33(B)(5) is a state in which the power supply state is the power OFF state and the setting key SW is ON, as shown in FIG. 33(B)(4).

Since the power supply state is also OFF in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output no sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) does not display.

<Management screen display example 2/Power status: Power OFF → Power ON>
The states shown in FIGS. 33B and 33B(6) are states in which the power state shown in FIG. 33B(5) is the power OFF state, and the power switch is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade, and the power state changes from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF (a certain operation is canceled) after power is turned off in a state where a management screen SD (management display) is displayed, and when the power is turned on, the display of the management display is started without performing the certain operation.

More specifically, in step S205 of the main control unit initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 26, the main control unit 300 determines whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF when the state before the power failure is after the setting confirmation start command has been transmitted and the setting confirmation end command has not been transmitted.

When receiving this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33(B)(6), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21), detection means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 21) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, and a certain operation (for example, turning from OFF to ON by rotating. a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of patterns; and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, wherein the detection means changes the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is closed. the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state; the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator; when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started; In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started, and in the state where the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 33 (B) (3)) is displayed, the power supply When the certain operation is released after the power is turned off and the power is turned on, the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 33 (B) (6)) starts to be displayed without performing the certain operation.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are rotating or medals are being bet), there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed. Therefore, even if the door is open, the display for management is not displayed while the reels are rotating, thereby improving security. In addition, if the management display is not correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the game clerk.

In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (replay)) by the stop button, the management display may not start to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in the stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is being played and the management display cannot be started, thereby improving security.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 3 of management screen>
Next, display example 3 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Management screen display example 3/reel operation status: in operation>
The state shown in FIG. 34(A)(1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state of the door body, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating).

In this state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a game light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during the game, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the performance during the game.

<Management screen display example 3/front door: door closed → door open>
The state shown in FIG. 34(A)(2) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door body closed state described with reference to FIG.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the opening sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), while the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 continues the presentation during the game.

<Management screen display example 3/Turn ON the setting key SW during reel rotation>
The state shown in FIG. 34(A)(3) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state while the reel operation state shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that even if an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the operation to turn ON the setting key SW is performed (certain operation), the state in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered, and the display of the management screen (management display) is not started.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the subsequent step S604 is not executed, so the set value is not displayed on the set value display device 101a. In addition, since the processing of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, so as shown in FIG.

<Management screen display example 3/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the manager of the amusement arcade when the reel operation state shown in FIG.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation was performed, so although illustration is omitted, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (Bell) (in this example, the "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination) is displayed in the symbol display window 113, and as shown in FIG. D1 (in this example, an image of a bell pattern and a display of a character string "GET!!") is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 34(A)(4), since the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emit an opening sound. , a winning notification sound may be output to indicate that a winning combination has been won (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Management screen display example 3/Management screen display>
The state shown in FIG. 34(A)(5) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 34(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the setting key SW is turned on from OFF (some operation). pattern combination), it is configured to start displaying the management screen SD (management display),
More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period and the setting key SW is ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen when this setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300. As a result, as shown in FIG. 34(A)(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21), detection means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 21) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, and a certain operation (for example, turning from OFF to ON by rotating. a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of patterns; and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, wherein the detection means changes the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is closed. the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state; the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator; when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started; In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 34 (A) (5)) starts to be displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are rotating or medals are being bet), there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed. Therefore, even if the door is open, the display for management is not displayed while the reels are rotating, thereby improving security.

The first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 22) and second operation means (for example, cross button 193 shown in FIG. 21) are provided, and when an operation is performed by the second operation means, the volume output from the sound output means can be changed, and the display means displays a volume value (for example, volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. While the display for management is being displayed, the volume value display can be displayed by the display means, but the volume output from the sound output means may not be changed even if an operation is performed by the second operation means (see, for example, FIG. 38(B)(3)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the display for management is being displayed, and the convenience of the manager of the game parlor can be improved.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position where the door body can be operated in either the open state or the closed state.

With such a configuration, not only the manager of the game parlor but also the player can adjust the volume, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

<Display example 4 of management screen>
Next, display example 4 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 34(B)(1) to 34(B)(3) is the same state as the setting confirmation mode described with reference to FIGS. 34(A)(1) to 34(A)(3), and when the power state is ON, the front door 102 is in the door body open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the amusement arcade, but the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (reel operation). is in operation), the management screen SD is not displayed. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Management screen display example 4/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 34(B)(4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the manager of the amusement arcade when the reel operation state shown in FIG.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) is internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. Although illustration is omitted, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (replay) (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed in the symbol display window 113, the replay state is entered, and as shown in FIG. , a prize-winning notification display ND2 (in this example, a display of a replay pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that a replay combination (replay) has been won.

<Management screen display example 4/Hide management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 34(B)(5) is the state after winning of the replay combination explained with reference to FIG. 34(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the setting key SW is turned on from OFF (some operation). corresponding symbol combination), it is configured not to start displaying the management screen SD (management display),
More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 101a because it is a replay state (MAX bet state) and the setting value confirmation valid period is not reached, and the setting value confirmation processing is terminated, and the subsequent processing of step S604 is not executed. In addition, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, so that the management screen SD does not start to be displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) as shown in FIG.

According to this example, in the first state (the front door 102 is open and the detection state of the open/close sensor is the open detection state), the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (replay)) by the stop button, the display for management is configured not to start. (because it will be in a max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display cannot be started, thereby improving security.

<Error notification display example 1>
Next, display example 1 of error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order.

<Error notification display example 1/reel operating status: operating (error non-detected status)>
The state shown in FIG. 35(A)(1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating), and an error non-detection state.

In this state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a game light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during the game, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the performance during the game.

<Error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating (error detection status)>
The state shown in FIG. 35(A)(2) is a state in which an error has occurred in the reel operating state shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured not to start displaying an error notification (error display) even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected in a state where the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 31, the main control unit 300 determines in subsequent steps S702 and S703 that it is an error reporting possible period (in this example, a period in which the setting is not being changed and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error is not being reported, in subsequent step S704, the error reporting start process is executed. do.

The state shown in FIG. 35(A)(2) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating), and since it is not an error reportable period, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and the in-game effect is continued as shown in FIG. 35(A)(2) without starting an error report.

<Error notification display example 3/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 35(A)(3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by a third stop operation (stop operation) performed by the manager of the amusement arcade while the reel operation state shown in FIG. 35(A)(2) is in operation (error detection state).

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed, so although illustration is omitted, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (Bell) (in this example, the "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination) is displayed in the symbol display window 113, and as shown in FIG. D1 (in this example, an image of a bell pattern and a display of a character string "GET!!") is displayed.

In addition, the luminous body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a bell emission mode suggesting that a small winning combination (bell) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs a bell effect sound suggesting that a small winning combination (bell) has been won.

<Error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 35(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 35(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and an error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected. When stopped at the corresponding symbol combination), it is configured to start displaying the error notification ER (error display),
More specifically, the main control unit 300 is an error reporting period in the steps S702 -S703, which follows the steps S701 to S701 in other device monitoring processing, which is explained using FIG. If it is determined that it is not in the notification of each error, it will start an error reward in the following step S704.

Since the state shown in FIG. 35(A)(4) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start processing, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, the error notification is started.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 35(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, display of a character string "Selector error has occurred!" and display of a character string "Please call a game clerk."). Also, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk").

The mode of error notification is not limited to this example. For example, after executing the first error notification in which the content of the error is unidentifiable (for example, display of a character string "Please call a game clerk."), the second error notification in which the content of the error is identifiable (for example, display of a character string "Selector error has occurred!") may be executed to notify the error content in stages.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (A) (2′), when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, when a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, a special error notification (error display) may be displayed. Further, in this case, even if there is an operation (error cancellation operation) by the reset switch while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, the error may not be canceled.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21), detection means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 21) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, and a certain operation (for example, turning from OFF to ON by rotating. a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of patterns; and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, wherein the detection means changes the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is closed. the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state; the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator; when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started; In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started, and when an error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected in the state where the reels are stopped. It is configured to be able to start to display an error display related to a certain error, and is configured not to start displaying the error display even if the certain error is detected in the first state in which the reels are rotating, and in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain error is detected, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) by the stop button, the error display (for example, FIG. 3). 5(A)(4), the game machine is configured to start displaying an error notification ER).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are rotating or medals are being bet), there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed. Therefore, even if the door is open, the display for management is not displayed while the reels are rotating, thereby improving security. Further, even if an error occurs during a game (for example, during reel rotation or when medals are bet), error notification is not started, and error notification is started immediately after the game is stopped, thereby improving security.

In the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (replay)) by the stop button, the management display may not start to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in the stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is being played and the management display cannot be started, thereby improving security.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Error notification display example 2>
Next, a display example 2 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 35(B). FIG. 35B is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 35(B)(1) to 35(B)(2) are the same states as the error detection states described with reference to FIGS. 35(A)(1) to 35(A)(2), and are states in which an error occurs while the reel operation state is in operation (error non-detection state) and the error detection state is entered. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Error notification display example 2/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 35(B)(3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by a third stop operation (stop operation) performed by the amusement arcade manager while the reel operation state shown in FIG. 35(B)(2) is in operation (error detection state).

In the same state, since the replay is internally won and the third stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay (replay) is displayed in the symbol display window 113 (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay"), and as shown in FIG. A winning notification display ND2 (in this example, an image of a replay pattern and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a prize has been won is displayed.

In addition, light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a replay light emission mode suggesting winning of a replay role (replay), and a sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs a replay effect sound suggesting winning of a replay role (replay).

<Error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 35(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the replay combination (replay) explained with reference to FIG. 35(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and an error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected. It is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display) when the game is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to play).

More specifically, the main control unit 300 is an error reporting period in the steps S702 -S703, which follows the steps S701 to S701 in other device monitoring processing, which is explained using FIG. If it is determined that it is not in the notification of each error, it will start an error reward in the following step S704.

The state shown in FIG. 35(B)(4) is a replay state by replay, but since it is also an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start processing, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, the error notification is started.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 35(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, display of a character string "Selector error has occurred!" and display of a character string "Please call a game clerk."). Also, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk").

According to this example, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, when the stop button is pressed to stop the plurality of reels in the second stop mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay), the management display does not start displaying, but an error display starts. Security can be improved by starting the error notification immediately regardless of the stop mode.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen and the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating (error detection status)>
The state shown in FIG. 36(A)(1) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned ON by the manager of the amusement arcade, while the reel operation state is in operation, the front door 102 is in the open state, the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state is performed.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that even if an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the operation to turn ON the setting key SW is performed (certain operation), the state in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered, and the display of the management screen (management display) is not started.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In the state shown in FIG. 36(A) (1), one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, so the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the subsequent step S604 is not executed, so the set value is not displayed on the set value display device 101a. Also, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, so as shown in FIG.

Further, the slot machine 100 is configured not to start displaying an error notification ER (error display) even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected in a state where the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 31, the main control unit 300 determines in subsequent steps S702 and S703 that it is an error reporting possible period (in this example, a period in which the setting is not being changed and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error is not being reported, in subsequent step S704, the error reporting start process is executed. do.

The state shown in FIG. 36 (A) (1) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating), and since it is not an error reportable period, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and the in-game effect is continued without starting an error report.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in (A) (2) of FIG. 36 is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by a third stop operation (stop operation) performed by the manager of the amusement arcade during the operation (error detection state) of the reel operation state shown in (A) (1) of the same figure.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) is internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed, so although illustration is omitted, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (Bell) (in this example, the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell") is displayed in the symbol display window 113, and as shown in FIG. D1 (in this example, an image of a bell pattern and a display of a character string "GET!!") is displayed.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 36(A)(3) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 36(A)(2).

In the slot machine 100, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a state in which a certain operation is being performed), and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state). , the display of the management screen SD (management display) is not started, but the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 is an error reporting period in the steps S702 -S703, which follows the steps S701 to S701 in other device monitoring processing, which is explained using FIG. If it is determined that it is not in the notification of each error, it will start an error reward in the following step S704.

Since the state shown in FIG. 36(A)(3) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start processing, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, the error notification is started.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 36(A)(3), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, display of a character string "Selector error has occurred!" and display of a character string "Please call a game clerk."). Also, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk").

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/Error detected state → Error not detected state>
The state shown in FIG. 36(A)(4) is a state in which the error detection state shown in FIG. 36(A)(3) has changed to the error non-detection state.

In this state, after the medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) has been resolved and the error detection state has changed to the error non-detection state, the error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and an opening sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), while the error detection state becomes an error non-detection state, so the display of the preparation screen is started.

More specifically, when determining that the setting key SW is ON in step S708 after determining that the error notification end condition is satisfied in step S706 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main controller 300, the first sub-controller 400 displays the preparation screen until the management screen can be displayed, or displays the preparation screen for a predetermined time even if the management screen can be displayed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 36(A)(4), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, after the error notification ER ends, a preparation screen (in this example, displaying a character string "Preparing display for management") indicating that preparation for display of the display for management SD is in progress, starts to be displayed. The screen before the management screen SD is displayed is not limited to this example.
The state shown in FIGS. 36A and 36(5) is a state in which an error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW after the error non-detected state shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a state in which a certain operation is being performed), and a certain error (in this example, a medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state). display) is started, and after a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) has not been detected, the reset SW (second operation means) is operated, the display of the error notification ER (error display) and the preparation screen is ended, and the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 30, the main control unit 300 sets the value confirmation effective period (in this example, the MAX bet state (the number of medals that can be started in one game (three in this example) is bet, or the replay state by replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and the error is not being reported). and when it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period and the setting key SW is ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen when this setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36(A)(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As shown in FIG. 36(A)(4′), even if the error detection state is the error non-detection state, the error notification ER may be continued even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the closed detection state, and the error cannot be cleared even if the reset SW (second operation means) is operated (error cancellation operation).

Further, when the management screen SD is displayed during the display of the number of payouts, the display of the number of payouts may be terminated. Further, even if a certain error occurs while the management screen SD is being displayed, it may be configured so as not to perform the error notification of the occurrence of the error.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21), detection means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 21) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, and a certain operation (for example, turning from OFF to ON by rotating. a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of patterns; and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, wherein the detection means changes the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is closed. the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state; the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator; when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started; When an error (e.g., medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reel is stopped, display of an error display related to the error can be started, and even if the error is detected in the first state and the reel is rotating, the error display does not start to be displayed. is being performed and the certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), when the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button, the display of the management display is not started, but the display of the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 36 (A) (3)) is started.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped, the error display is given priority over the management display, thereby improving security.

In addition, the second operation means (for example, reset SW) is provided, and when the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the second state, the error display is started to be displayed, and an operation is performed by the second operation means after the error is not detected, the error display is ended, and the management display (for example, the tube shown in FIG. 36 (A) (5). It is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for store clerks.

Further, when an operation by the second operation means is performed, the display of the error display is terminated, and the display of the management display is started, a certain display (for example, the screen during preparation shown in FIG. 36 (A) (4)) may be displayed before starting the display of the management display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the second operation means has been accepted, and convenience for the manager of the gaming parlor can be enhanced.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts, etc., since only the manager of the game parlor can operate the second operating means.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification>
Next, a display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 36(B). FIG. 36B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Turn on the setting key SW when the power is turned off>
The state shown in FIG. 36(B)(1) is a state in which the power supply state is OFF, the front door 102 is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor is in an open detection state, and an error detection state, and the setting key SW is turned ON by an operation (some operation) that turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON.

In this state, an error is detected, but since the power supply is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is not displayed.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/starting setting change mode, display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 36(B)(2) is a state in which the power supply state is changed from power OFF to power ON by the manager of the amusement arcade by operating the power switch while the setting key SW is in the ON state described with reference to FIG. 36(B)(1).

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on in a state in which an operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, and in this state, the slot machine 100 shifts to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) and outputs a setting change sound from sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 36(B)(2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Furthermore, when the slot machine 100 is powered on in a state where the front door 102 (door body) is open and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), an operation (a certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON (some operation), and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), when the power is turned on, the display of the error notification ER (error display) does not start, but the management screen ( administrative view).

More specifically, in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 26, the main control unit 300 starts the setting change process described with reference to FIG. 27 when it determines that the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON.

Subsequently, in step S302 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start setting change to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen when receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36(B)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current set values using the set value display device 101a.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Set value>
The state shown in FIG. 36(B)(3) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the administrator of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

When the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, in subsequent steps S308 and S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored (confirmed) as a new setting value, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is hidden.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 36(B)(4) is a state in which display of the error notification ER is started after the setting values shown in FIG. 36(B)(3) are determined.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the state in which an operation (a certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the state (a second state) in which a certain error (in this example, a medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected. operation) is released, the display of the management screen (management display) is ended, and the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 is an error reporting period in the steps S702 -S703, which follows the steps S701 to S701 in other device monitoring processing, which is explained using FIG. If it is determined that it is not in the notification of each error, it will start an error reward in the following step S704.

Since the state shown in FIG. 36(B)(4) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start processing, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, the error notification is started.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 36(B)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, display of a character string "Selector error has occurred!" and display of a character string "Please call a game clerk."). Also, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk").

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 21), detection means (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 21) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, and a certain operation (for example, turning from OFF to ON by rotating. a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) that are rotationally driven and provided with a plurality of types of patterns; and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, wherein the detection means changes the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is closed. the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state; the display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator; and when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the display of the management display can be started when the certain operation is performed. The gaming machine is configured to be able to start displaying an error display related to a certain error, and in the first state, the state in which a certain operation is being performed, and the state in which the certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), when the power is turned on, the error display does not start to be displayed, but the management display (for example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIG. 36 (B) (2)) is started to be displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the display for management is given priority over the error display, thereby providing a user-friendly amusement machine for the manager of the amusement parlor.

A start lever (for example, the start lever 135) may be provided, and when the certain operation is canceled after the start lever is operated in the second state, the display of the management display is ended and the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 36(B)(4)) is started to be displayed.

With such a configuration, after the start lever is operated, the management screen can be terminated and the error display can be started, so that the occurrence of the error can be reliably notified.

Further, a second operation means (for example, a reset switch) may be provided, and when the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the error cannot be cleared even if the second operation means is operated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions such as forcibly canceling the error state, thereby improving security.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts, etc., since only the manager of the game parlor can operate the second operating means.

<Display of setting history>
Next, the setting history display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a diagram showing the flow of setting history display in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 37A(1) to 37(A)(2) is the same as the setting change mode described with reference to FIGS. 32(A)(1) to 32(A)(2), and is a state in which the power is turned on while the setting key SW is operated from OFF to ON, and the setting value can be changed (setting change mode). A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Specific operations in setting history display/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 37(A)(3) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting change mode and display of the setting history has started.

The display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 can display a history display (in this example, the setting history SH) showing the history of the occurrence of the first event (in this example, setting value confirmation by setting change). It is possible to display a history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event that occurred in the past (set value determination due to setting change).

In this example, the setting history SH as shown in FIG.

The display mode of the setting history SH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time when the setting change (or setting confirmation) was performed, the setting value set (or confirmed) by the setting change (or setting confirmation), and the operation content (setting change or setting confirmation) can be displayed in chronological order. Minutes x seconds, setting value: 6, operation: confirmation”, items related to setting changes and setting confirmations that have been made in the past are displayed in chronological order (in order of newest (or oldest) date and time).

According to this example, it is possible to easily check the setting values and the like set in the past by the manager of the game parlor. Also, even if it is displayed by an illegal operation to the player, it is less likely to be used for fraud because the history display is not for the event that occurred this time, but for the event that occurred in the past.

<Confirmation of setting values in setting history display/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 37(A)(4) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated by the administrator of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, in subsequent steps S308 and S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored (confirmed) as a new setting value (here, setting 5), the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is hidden.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), in a certain state (setting change mode) in which the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) has occurred, history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) that has occurred this time cannot be displayed.

According to this example, since the history of the setting value due to the current setting change (the history display of the first event that occurred this time) is not displayed, for example, when the player illegally performs a setting change operation, it is not possible to easily check whether the setting change was correctly performed, thereby improving security.

In the state shown in FIG. 37(A)(4), the setting key is kept ON, so the setting history SH continues to be displayed, but in the setting change mode, the setting history corresponding to the setting value set this time (in this example, the date and time when the setting change was performed, the setting value set by the setting change, and the details of the operation (setting change)) are not displayed.

In addition, when the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the slot machine 100 can erase at least a part of the history display (setting history SH) related to the first event (setting value confirmation by setting change) that occurred in the state (setting change mode) in which the first event (setting value confirmation by setting change) occurred. History SH) cannot be erased.

Specifically, when the cross button 193 is operated to select and press the "delete history" button located below the setting history SH, at least part of the past setting history SH (in this example, only the setting history SH being displayed) is deleted.

According to this example, since the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values resulting from the current setting change) cannot be cleared (deleted), it is difficult to destroy the evidence of the fraudulent act when the setting is changed illegally, and security can be improved. In addition, when it is desired to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting value resulting from the setting change of this time), it is necessary to shift to a certain state again.

<Displaying the setting history/Exiting the setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 37(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

When the main control unit 300 determines in step S310 of the setting change process that the setting key SW is OFF, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-control unit 400, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing for ending display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 37(A)(5), the setting history SH of the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Displaying the setting history/starting the setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B is a state in which the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 37A and 5 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the setting key SW is turned ON by the amusement arcade manager (some operation) from OFF to ON.

Since the slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on, the slot machine 100 shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed in the same state.

Further, the slot machine 100 is configured to be able to start displaying the management screen SD (management display) when an operation (some operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state). Since the item has been selected, the setting history SH is displayed first in the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 37(A)(6).

In this example, since the setting value was changed to setting 5 in the most recent setting change mode (Fig. 37 (A) (4)), as a history display corresponding to the first event (setting value change) that occurred in the past in the setting history SH, "(No. 3) Setting change/confirmation date: _________________ _______________ _______________, setting value: 5, operation: change" and "(No.4) setting" as a history display corresponding to the confirmation of the setting value in this setting confirmation mode. Changed/confirmed date and time: MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/s of MM, set value: 5, operation: Confirmation” is additionally displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to easily check the setting values and the like set in the past by the manager of the game parlor.

<Display error history>
Next, the error history display will be described with reference to FIG. 37(B). FIG. 37B is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order.

<Display error history/start setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 37(B)(1) is a state in which the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the setting key SW is turned ON by an operation (some operation) that turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON.

Since the slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on, the slot machine 100 shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed in the same state.

In addition, the slot machine 100 can be displayed to display the management screen SD (management display) when the front door 102 (door body) is open and the detection status of the opening and closing sensor (detection means) is performed in the open detection state (first state). As shown in FIG. 37 (B) (1), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Specific operations in error history display/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 37(B)(2) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode and display of the error history has started.

The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 can display a history display (error history EH in this example) showing the history of occurrence of a second event (door opening or door closing in this example). It is possible to display a history display (error history EH) related to door opening and door closing.

More specifically, in step S502 of the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 29, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating an open detection state, the main control unit 300 stores open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308, and transmits a door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 transmits this door open detection command to the main control unit 30. 0, the open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, the information indicating 'open' and the date and time of opening) is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and door open notification is performed.

On the other hand, in step S502 of the device monitoring process, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating an open detection state, the main control unit 300 stores in the RAM 308 closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected, and transmits a door closure detection command indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door closure detection command from the main control unit 300, the front door 102 closure detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) indicating that the closure of the store has been detected is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

In this example, when an error history item is selected from the menu display of the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), open detection information (information indicating "open" and date and time of opening) and closed detection information (information indicating "closed" and date and time of closing) are acquired from the RAM 408, and as shown in FIG. .

The display mode of the error history EH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time of error occurrence and the content of the error that occurred can be displayed in chronological order. No. 4) Date and time of occurrence of error: XX, XX, XX, XX, XX, Occurred error: door open", items related to errors that have occurred this time and in the past are displayed in chronological order (in order of newest (or oldest) date and time).

<Error history display/Front door: Door open → Door closed>
The state shown in FIG. 37B(3) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to continue to display the error history EH (management display) even when the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the error history EH (management display) is being displayed. In the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emitting light in the open state are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that output the opening sound is set to non-output.

In addition, since the front door 102 has changed from the door body open state to the door body closed state, as a history display corresponding to the first event (door open error) that occurred this time, a history display of "(No. 5) Date and time of error occurrence: Date and time when the closure of the front door 102 was detected, Error: Door closed" is additionally displayed.

According to this example, since the history of opening and closing of the door can be displayed, it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts and the past work status, etc., and it is possible to enhance the convenience of the manager of the game parlor.

<Displaying the error history/Exiting the setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 37(B)(4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process that the setting key SW is OFF, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation end command indicating to end setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 37(B)(4), the error history EH displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) is a game machine provided with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21), and the display means can display a history display (for example, the setting history SH shown in FIG. It is possible to display a history display (for example, an error history EH shown in FIG. 37(B)(2)) showing the history of the occurrence of events (for example, door opening and door closing), and when the second event occurs in a certain state, the history display related to the second event that occurred this time can be displayed in the certain state in which the second event occurred. The game machine is characterized in that the history display relating to the first event cannot be displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values resulting from the setting change of this time) is not displayed. Therefore, for example, when a player illegally performs a setting change operation, it is not possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change was correctly performed, thereby improving security.

Further, when the second event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the second event occurred, the history display regarding the second event that occurred in the past may be displayed, and when the first event occurred in the certain state, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the past may be displayed in the state in which the first event occurred.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily check the setting values set in the past by the administrator of the game parlor, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the management of the amusement parlor. Also, even if it is displayed by a player through an illegal operation, it is less likely to be used for illegal acts because it is a history display of events that occurred in the past.

Further, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, at least part of the history related to the first event that occurred in the past may be erased, while the history related to the first event that occurred this time may not be erased.

With such a configuration, the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of set values resulting from the setting change of this time) cannot be cleared, so when the setting is changed illegally, it is difficult to destroy the evidence of the illegal act, and security can be improved. In addition, when it is desired to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting value resulting from the setting change of this time), it is necessary to shift to a certain state again.

Further, an operation means may be provided, and the first event may be that an operation for confirming a set value is performed by the operation means.

With such a configuration, even when an operation for confirming the setting value is performed, the setting value confirmed by the operation is not displayed. Therefore, for example, when the player illegally performs the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily confirm whether the setting change has been correctly performed, so that security can be improved.

Further, a door (e.g., a front door 102 shown in FIG. 21) that can be opened and closed is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and detection means (e.g., an open/close sensor) capable of detecting an open/closed state of the door may be provided, and the detection means may be means capable of changing a detection state to a closed detection state when the door is in a closed state, and the second event may be that the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display the history of the opening and closing of the door body, so that it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts and the past work status, etc., and the convenience of the manager of the game parlor can be improved.

<Volume adjustment>
Next, volume adjustment will be described with reference to FIG.

<When the volume adjustment/management screen is not displayed>
FIG. 38A is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed.

FIG. 38(A)(1) shows a state in which the power state is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the stop effect is being executed, and the management screen is not displayed.

In this state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output the stop BGM, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the stop effect, but in this example, the stop BGM is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

FIG. 38(A)(2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD is not displayed.

In this state, in a state where the volume value display VD is not displayed, when a volume increase operation (in this example, operation by the up button or right button of the cross button 193) for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is received, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but the decrease in volume is also configured such that, when the volume value display VD is not displayed, the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started to be displayed while the volume value is not decreased when a volume decrease operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193) is received to decrease the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277).

FIG. 38(A)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 38(A)(2) is displayed.

In this state, in the state where the volume value display VD is displayed, the volume is increased by one step upon receipt of a volume increase operation (in this example, operation by the up button or right button of the cross button 193), and the volume value display VD indicating the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5) is displayed, and the stop BGM is output at the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5).

In this example, increasing the volume has been described, but in the same way, when the volume value display VD is displayed, when a volume decrease operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193) is accepted, the volume is decreased by one step, the volume value display VD indicating the volume value after the decrease (volume 3 in this example) is displayed, and the stopped BGM is output at the volume value after the decrease (volume 3 in this example).

As an operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, an administrator volume adjustment SW may be provided. In this case, when a volume increase operation or a volume decrease operation is performed by the administrator volume adjustment SW while the volume value display VD is displayed as shown in FIG.

<When the volume adjustment/management screen is displayed>
FIG. 38B is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in time series when the management screen is displayed.

FIG. 38(B)(1) shows a state in which the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the open/close sensor is in an open detection state, the setting key SW is ON, and the management screen SD is displayed.

In this state, since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an opening sound. In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the management screen SD is displayed.

Note that the opening sound and error sound may be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the set volume value.

FIG. 38(B)(2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 is not displayed.

In this state, in a state where the volume value display VD2 is not displayed, when a volume increase operation (in this example, operation by the up button or right button of the cross button 193) for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is received, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but in the same way, in the state where the volume value display VD is not displayed, when a volume decrease operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193) for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is received, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started, but the volume is not decreased.

FIG. 38(B)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 38(B)(2) is displayed.

In this state, while the volume value display VD2 is being displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, operation by the up button or right button of the cross button 193) for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is accepted, but since the management screen SD is being displayed, the volume is not increased, and the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) continues to be displayed.

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is similarly performed in a state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed, even if a volume decrease operation (in this example, an operation by the lower button or left button of the cross button 193) for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is received, since the management screen SD is being displayed, the volume is not decreased, and the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) continues to be displayed. do.

As an operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, an administrator volume adjustment SW may be provided. In this case, when a volume increase operation or a volume decrease operation is performed by the administrator volume adjustment SW while the volume value display VD is displayed, the volume may be adjusted, and the volume value display VD indicating the volume value after the volume adjustment may be displayed.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the game state of the AT system will be described. FIG. 39 is a simple game flow showing an AT game state.

First, the game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. A low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, a normal section, or a normal state. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state (a state that is more advantageous than the low-navigation state (normal state) in terms of operation navigation (notification of operation information)), and is also called AT mode, advantageous section, or advantageous state.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect for notifying the operation information (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (operation means) in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state.

When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, the result is advantageous to the player, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically means that the ratio of the total number of game media put out by the game machine to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing a game for a predetermined period, that is, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate) is advantageous. In addition, the stock time and the CZ state are easier to shift to the CZ state and the AT state than the normal stage, so it can be said that the stock time and the CZ state are more advantageous than the normal stage.

In this example, the low-navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation-navigation is low, and the high-navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation-navigation is higher than in the low-navigation state.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. In this example, the performance state of the low navigation state includes a special stage, and the performance state of the high navigation state includes a stock time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as 'ST'), a normal stage, a CZ state (a state that is easier to shift to an AT state than a normal stage), and an AT state. Among these performance states, the AT state is, in principle, a state in which the number of balls to be paid out increases. Note that the effect state is not limited to this example, and for example, the high-navigation state may include other effect states such as a confirmation notification state, a pullback state, and the like.

In this embodiment, when the condition (A) is established in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section) (in this example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the stock time shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section). It should be noted that after the RAM is cleared such as when the setting is changed, if the condition (A) is satisfied, it may be configured so as to shift to the stock time, or it may be configured not to shift.

The stock time (first gaming state) is a state in which a CZ lottery capable of acquiring the right to shift to the CZ state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “CZ”) or stocking one or more CZs is possible.

In this stock time, even if the CZ lottery is won, the CZ obtained by the CZ lottery is stocked (accumulated) without shifting to the CZ state until the number of games prescribed in the stock time (first period, 50 games in this example) elapses.

Then, when the condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has passed with no CZ stocked), the stage shifts to the normal stage, and when the condition (C) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has passed with the CZ stocked), it shifts to the CZ state. It should be noted that the transition destination when the condition (C) is satisfied in the stock time is not limited to the CZ state.

Note that the conditions (B) and (C) for ending the stock time are not limited to this example, and may be less or more than 50 games.

According to this example, even if the CZ lottery is won (even if a certain condition is met), the game does not shift to the CZ state (second game state) until the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) is completed.

In addition, when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the transition to the CZ state or the AT state does not occur until the number of games stipulated in the stock time has elapsed. Therefore, for example, in the case of shifting from the previous advantageous section (AT state end) to the next advantageous section through the normal section, it is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls are paid out in a short period of time, resulting in an unnecessarily high level of gambling.

The normal stage has various performance stages, and is a state in which a CZ lottery that can acquire the right (CZ) to shift to the CZ state is possible.

In this normal stage, when the condition (D) is established (in this example, when the CZ is won), the CZ is not stocked, and the state is immediately shifted to the CZ state.

The CZ state (second game state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (special stage) in the low navigation state (normal section) or the normal stage in the high navigation state (advantageous section) (for example, it is easier to shift to the AT state when winning a rare role in the CZ state than when winning a rare role in a normal stage). There is a fixed CZ state (fourth gaming state). The strong CZ state is a state in which transition to the AT state is more likely than in the weak CZ state, and the AT determined CZ state is a state in which the AT state always transitions after the CZ state ends.

In the CZ state, when the condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, when the CZ predetermined number of games (9 games in this example) have passed without winning the AT in the CZ state), the normal stage is entered, and when the condition (F) is satisfied (in this example, when the AT is won in the CZ state and the CZ predetermined number of games (9 games in this example) have elapsed), the state is transferred to the AT state.

The conditions (E) and (F) for ending the CZ state are not limited to this example, and may be less than or more than 9 games. In addition, the CZ state may be ended by winning a prescribed number of specific winning combinations, or when the AT state is won, the state may be shifted to the AT state before the predetermined number of games has passed (the CZ state may be ended).

The AT state is a state in which an AT game can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games per set), and is more advantageous to the player than a special stage in a low navigation state (normal section) or a stock time in a high navigation state (advantageous section), etc. In this example, there are a normal AT, an AT addition state in which an additional lottery for the AT game is executed, and an ED state in which an ED (ending) effect that suggests the end of the high navigation state is executed.

In addition, in this AT state, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and when the set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games (in this example, 30 games per set) are given to extend the AT state.

When the condition (G) is satisfied in this AT state (when the AT end condition is satisfied (in this example, when all games are played in the AT state), or when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (in this example, when 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section or 2400 coins have been paid out in the advantageous section), a transition is made to a special stage in a low navigation state (normal section).

It should be noted that the advantageous section end condition is an example, and may be the case where 3000 games have passed, or the case where 3000 coins have been paid out.

Also, in this example, the production state is the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), but the production state may be the stock time or the normal stage even in the low navigation state (normal section). In other words, even in the low navigation state (normal section), if the production state is set to stock time (or/and normal stage), the stock time (or/and normal stage) has a period of low navigation state (normal section) and a period of high navigation state (advantageous section). Conversely, the special stage may be continued even when the game transitions to a high navigation state (advantageous section).

<CZ lottery>
Next, the CZ lottery executed during the stock time and the normal stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c).

The CZ lottery is a lottery in which the right (CZ) to shift to the CZ state can be acquired, and in this example, when a specific symbol combination (weak cherry, watermelon, chance, strong cherry in this example) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113 in the normal stage or stock time, the CZ lottery using the CZ determination table to be described later is executed.

The lottery mode of the CZ lottery includes a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively high and a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively low. When shifting to a normal stage or stock time, a low-probability mode is set first, but a high-probability mode is set when a certain winning combination (for example, a rare combination with a low winning probability) is won in each performance state.

<CZ lottery / normal stage>
FIG. 40(b) is a diagram showing an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery in the normal stage. For convenience of explanation, only the CZ determination table to be referred to when the setting value is setting 1 will be exemplified, but for setting 2 to setting 6, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the CZ lottery.

In the normal stage (low-probability mode), when the pattern combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 2% (CZ is obtained), when the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 1% (CZ is obtained), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the probability is 6%. Wins the CZ lottery (obtains CZ) with , and wins the CZ lottery (obtains CZ) with a probability of 27% when the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113.例文帳に追加

In the normal stage (high-probability mode), when the pattern combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 13% (CZ is obtained), when the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 7% (CZ is obtained), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, 2 is won. The player wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 0% (obtains CZ), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 34% (obtains CZ).

<CZ Lottery / Stock Time>
FIG. 40(c) is a diagram showing an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery during stock time.

In the stock time (low-probability mode), when the pattern combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 10% (CZ is obtained), when the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 5% (CZ is obtained), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the probability is 12%. The player wins the CZ lottery (acquires CZ) with a probability of , and wins the CZ lottery (acquires CZ) with a probability of 30% when the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113.例文帳に追加In this example, even in the same low-probability mode, the stock time (low-probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (low-probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

In the stock time (high-probability mode), when the pattern combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 15% (CZ is obtained), when the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 11% (CZ is obtained), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, The player wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 40% (obtains CZ), and wins the CZ lottery with 100% probability (obtains CZ) when the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113.例文帳に追加In this example, even in the same high-probability mode, the stock time (high-probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (high-probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

According to this example, it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the advantageous section (high-probability mode) during the stock time (first period), and to increase the player's willingness to play during the stock time (first period).

<Example of transition of production state in advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40(a), an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a diagram showing an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section.

As described with reference to FIG. 39, in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section), when winning a winning combination other than losing, the game shifts to the stock time of the high navigation state (advantageous section).

The condition for transitioning to stock time is not limited to this example. For example, when the conditions for transitioning from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section) are met, the system may be configured to always shift to stock time. Alternatively, a lottery may be used to determine whether to shift to stock time.

In the stock time, as shown in Fig. 40 (a) (1) and (2), even if the CZ lottery is won, the CZ state is not shifted to the CZ state until the number of games specified in the stock time (50 games) has passed, the CZ is stocked (accumulated), the premonition effect is executed for a certain period (a period of 5 games in this example) from the game in which the CZ lottery is won, and in the final game of the certain period, the CZ winning announcement is made to suggest that the CZ lottery has been won.

In this example, in the stock time, even if the CZ lottery is won, the transition to the CZ state does not occur until the prescribed number of games (50 games) in the stock time has passed. After executing the performance and giving a CZ winning notice suggesting winning of the CZ lottery in the final game of a certain period, the game immediately shifts to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game of the premonition performance. Therefore, in the normal stage, the period (the number of games) from winning the CZ lottery to transitioning to the CZ state is the same regardless of the timing of winning the CZ lottery.

In the stock time, when the number of games specified for the stock time (50 games) has passed, if the CZ is not stocked, the stage is shifted to the normal stage, and if the CZ is stocked, the state is shifted to one of the weak CZ state, the strong CZ state, and the AT fixed CZ state among the CZ states.

In this example, when one CZ is stocked, for example, as shown in FIG. 40(a)(1), the state shifts to the weak CZ state before the lapse of the specified number of games (50 games) for the stock time. For example, as shown in FIG. That is, when a plurality of CZs are stocked during the stock time, the state shifts to a strong CZ state or an AT determined CZ state that is more advantageous to the player than a weak CZ state.

According to this example, it is possible to provide a new game property such as how many times the CZ lottery is won (how many times a certain condition is satisfied) before the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) is completed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, even after winning the CZ lottery (after a certain condition is established), the sense of expectation can be maintained without impairing the playability. In addition, it is possible to suppress gambling from becoming too high, and by winning the CZ lottery twice or more during the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) (by establishing a second number of certain conditions), it is possible to shift to a strong CZ state (fourth game state) or an AT fixed CZ state (fourth game state) that is more advantageous than a weak CZ state (third game state), so that the expectation of the player can be appropriately aroused.

Also, when the AT lottery is won in the CZ state shifted from the stock time, or when the stock time shifts to the AT fixed CZ, the AT game is shifted after the CZ state ends.

In addition, when three or more CZs are stocked in the stock time (when the AT game is settled), even if the number of games specified in the stock time (50 games) has not passed, the state may immediately shift to the AT settled CZ state. In addition to the CZ lottery, an AT lottery (a lottery with a lower probability of winning than the CZ lottery) is performed during the stock time, and when the AT lottery is won, the state may be immediately shifted to the AT state even before the number of games specified in the stock time (50 games) has passed.

In addition, in the final game of stock time, regardless of the presence or absence of stock of CZ, a judgment effect may be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the CZ state.
In addition), AT may be stocked, and in this case, depending on the number of ATs (and/or CZs) stocked, the rendering state to be shifted after the stock time may be determined.

<Production example in stock time>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of an effect during stock time will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in stock time in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 41(a), the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 48 games.

In this state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a background image for stock time (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon) that suggests that the production state is stock time, and also displays the number of remaining games in stock time (low-probability mode) (48 G in this example).

In the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 47 games, and the CZ lottery is won.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (47 G in this example) continue to be displayed, and since the player has won the CZ lottery, a premonition effect indicating that the player has won the CZ lottery is started.

Although the mode of the premonition performance is not particularly limited, in this example, the showdown performance showing how the main character confronts the enemy samurai is executed for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game winning the CZ lottery.

Specifically, in the precursory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 41(b), the character string "Showdown!" is displayed to indicate that the confrontation effect has started. In the precursory effect of the second game shown in FIG. After that, in the premonitory effect of the fifth game shown in FIG. 11(f), a victory scene in which the lord wins over the enemy and a CZ winning announcement (in this example, an image containing a character string "CZ win!") to inform that the CZ lottery has been won is displayed.

In this example, when the CZ lottery is won, an indication performance is performed and the CZ winning notification is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, there may be a case where the CZ winning notification is not performed in the indication performance, and whether or not to perform the CZ winning notification may be determined by lottery. In addition, there may be a case where the portent effect is not performed. Moreover, at least a part of the effect (for example, the background image for stock time) before the CZ winning notification is performed and the effect after the CZ winning notification may be different.

The state shown in FIG. 41(g) is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 46 games.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (46G in this example) continue to be displayed, and since one CZ was stocked by winning the CZ lottery, the CZ stock icon SI is displayed to indicate that the CZ has been stocked.

In this example, the number of remaining games in the stock time is not subtracted during the predictive effect, but the number of remaining games may be subtracted even during the predictive effect. Further, even when the CZ lottery is won, the CZ stock icon SI may be configured not to be displayed, and in this case, the portent effect may be configured not to be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 41(h) is the final game state of the stock time (low probability mode), and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 41(i) is the transition from the stock time (low probability mode) to the CZ state.

In this example, one CZ was stocked during the stock time (low-probability mode), so after shifting to the weak CZ state, in the weak CZ state, a CZ transition notification (in this example, an image including a character string display of "Enter CZ!") indicating that the state has shifted to the CZ state is displayed, and a background image for weak CZ (in this example, an image of the sea and sandy beach) suggesting that the production state is in the weak CZ state is displayed.

Also, in this example, an example of the production in the stock time (low probability mode) is shown, but in the stock time (high probability mode), for example, the production shown in FIG. 41(j) is performed.

In the stock time (high probability mode) presentation, in addition to displaying the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (48G in this example) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a high probability mode background image HD (in this example, a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high probability") indicating that the CZ lottery is in the high probability mode is displayed on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

The high-probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (a position spaced a predetermined distance from both ends), and the number of remaining games (48G in this example) is preferably displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the high-probability mode background image HD.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel special about the high-probability mode, and to increase the expectation of the player during the stock time (first period). In addition to being able to make the high-probability mode background image HD stand out, the high-probability mode background image HD does not hinder visibility of other images (display of the number of remaining games, etc.).

<Production example on a normal stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, an example of an effect in a normal stage will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a normal stage in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 42(a) is the state of the normal stage (low probability mode). In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a normal stage background image (in this example, an image of the inside of a castle) that suggests that the production state is the normal stage.

The state shown in FIG. 42(b) is the normal stage (low-probability mode) state, in which the CZ lottery is won.

In this state, the normal stage background image (image of the castle interior) continues to be displayed, and since the CZ lottery has been won, an indication effect indicating that the CZ lottery has been won is started.

Although the mode of the premonitory performance is not particularly limited, in this example, similar to the stock time, the confrontation performance showing how the hero's lord confronts the enemy samurai is executed over a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game winning the CZ lottery.

Specifically, in the precursory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 42(b), the character string "Showdown!" is displayed to indicate that the confrontation effect has started. In the precursory effect of the second game shown in FIG. After that, in the premonitory effect of the fifth game shown in FIG. 11(f), a victory scene in which the lord wins over the enemy and a CZ winning announcement (in this example, an image containing a character string "CZ win!") to inform that the CZ lottery has been won is displayed.

When two CZs are stocked in the stock time, it is configured to shift to the strong CZ state, but even in the normal stage, a CZ lottery may be performed in the premonitory performance after winning the CZ, and when the CZ lottery is won, the state may be shifted to the strong CZ state in the same manner as when two CZs are stocked.

The state shown in FIG. 42(g) is a state in which the normal stage (low-probability mode) has transitioned to the CZ state.

In this example, since the CZ lottery was won in the normal stage (low-probability mode), immediately after the transition to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game of the predictive effect, in the weak CZ state, a CZ transition notification (in this example, an image including a character string display of "CZ rush!" Displaying.

Also, in this example, an example of the effect in the normal stage (low probability mode) is shown, but in the normal stage (high probability mode), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 42(h) is performed.

In the production of the normal stage (high probability mode), in addition to displaying the background image for the normal stage (the image of the inside of the castle) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the high probability mode background image HD (in this example, a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high probability") indicating that the CZ lottery is in the high probability mode is displayed.

The high-probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position (at a predetermined distance from both ends) that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

Also, in this example, the background image for the normal stage (the image of the castle) and the background image for the stock time (the image of the night sky including the moon) are different images, but they may be the same image.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 21) is a game machine having control means (for example, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 23) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states. An advantageous second gaming state (for example, the CZ state and AT state shown in FIG. 39) is included, and the control means can set the second gaming state based on the fact that a certain condition has been established (for example, that the CZ lottery has been won) in the state in which the first gaming state is set, and the control means can set the second gaming state even if the certain condition is established in the first period (for example, the stock time of 50 games shown in FIG. 40(a)). The game machine is characterized in that the second game state is not set during the period, and the second game state is set after the first period ends.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the game does not shift to the second game state until the end of the first period. Therefore, the game can be enjoyed for a long period of time during the first period, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 21) is provided, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, a normal section shown in FIG. 39) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section shown in FIG. 39) including the first game state and the second game state. The first period may be entered when the normal state is changed to the advantageous state.

With such a configuration, when the state shifts to the advantageous state, the state shifts to the first period, so that the expectation from the previous advantageous state can be maintained, and when the normal state shifts to the advantageous state, too many balls are paid out in a short time, and the situation that the gambling property becomes higher than necessary can be avoided.

Also, the first period may be a period in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the second period (certain period other than the first period).

With such a configuration, the first period can be made to feel special compared to the second period, and the player's sense of expectation in the first period can be heightened.

Also, the first period may include a normal period (eg, low probability mode) and an advantageous period (eg, high probability mode) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than during the normal period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the advantageous period (high-probability mode) in the first period, and to increase the player's willingness to play in the first period. A certain period (second period) other than the first period may include a normal period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery or AT lottery is relatively low) and an advantageous period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery or AT lottery is relatively high) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal period.

Also, the effect executed during the normal period and the effect executed during the advantageous period may be at least partially different in effect mode (for example, in the high probability mode, the background image HD for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 41(j) (a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high accuracy") may be displayed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the advantageous section (high-probability mode) feel special, and to increase the player's expectation in the first period.

Moreover, even if the certain condition is satisfied during the first period, the certain condition may be satisfied during the first period after the certain condition is satisfied.

With such a configuration, even if a certain condition is met, the game does not shift to the second game state until the first period is over, so even if the certain condition is met early in the first period, the player is not made to feel lost, and the desire to play can be maintained.

In addition, the second game state includes a third game state (e.g., weak CZ state) and a fourth game state (e.g., strong CZ state, AT confirmed CZ state) that is more advantageous than the third game state, and when the number of times the certain condition is satisfied during the first period is a first number (e.g., once), the third game state is set after the end of the first period, and the number of times the certain condition is satisfied during the first period is a second number (e.g., 2 times or more), the fourth game state may be set after the end of the first period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new game feature of how many times a certain condition is satisfied before the first period ends, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even after a certain condition is satisfied, the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to suppress gambling from becoming too high, and by establishing a second number of certain conditions during the first period, it is possible to shift to a fourth game state which is more advantageous than the third game state, so that the expectation of the player can be appropriately aroused.

<<Embodiment 2>>
A gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 43 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are accommodated in the center inside (not shown) of the main body 101, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 (see FIG. 46). The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from a symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (also called an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light blocking piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123, for example, is a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1 or a special combination 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress (special combination 1 or 2 game state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp for notifying the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The effect button 156 is an operating means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button is configured by a button that can be pressed by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects are not limited to buttons, and may be configured with, for example, a lever, a touch panel, or the like, or a plurality of operating means may be provided.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payout display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), the next stop operation will be referred to as second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation will be referred to as third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

If the left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is indicated by "center or C", and the right stop button 139 is indicated by "right or R", the order of operation (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: (1) left→middle→right operation order (left center right or LCR); (2) left→right→middle operation order (left center right or LRC); (4) Middle→Right→Left operation order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center operation order (Right Left Center or RLC), and (6) Right→Center→Left operation order (Right Center Left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image display device) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed on the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears in front (on the player side).

In addition to the liquid crystal display device, any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation, and a setting switch that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) and to confirm settings by pressing are provided. The setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the setting switch is one setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values.

<Winning line>
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the winning lines will be explained. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines of the slot machine 100. FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 43, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is referred to as the left reel upper stage symbol, the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2) is referred to as the left reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is referred to as the left reel lower stage symbol.

In addition, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is called the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 5) is called the middle reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is called the middle reel lower stage symbol.

Also, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the figure; also called symbol position 7) is called the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is called the right reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 9) is called the right reel lower stage symbol.

In this embodiment, as the winning line, only a middle winning line L1 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "winning line L1") composed of left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5) and right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8) is provided.

Here, the winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbols visible through the symbol display window 113, and is the line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIGS. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the winning lines become effective, and when 3 medals are betted, the winning line L1 becomes effective. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

In the symbol display window 113, the symbol positions 2, 5 and 8 on the winning line L1 are hereinafter referred to as "winning positions", and the other symbol positions, that is, the symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 are sometimes referred to as "non-winning positions". That is, the winning position is a position on the winning line at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the pay line L1, a total of three lines may be set as valid pay lines: an upper pay line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel upper symbols, and right reel upper symbols; and a lower pay line composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel lower symbols.

<Control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control section 300 that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control section 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, stop positions of reels, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A DT (watch dog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (assuming that this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. start the main control unit main processing).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value thus acquired as an initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed for random values, or to determine the reading start position of the random number table.

The main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medals paid out from the medal payout device 180 at each interrupt time. The state of the medal payout sensor, the optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, the optical sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 for driving the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, and the game medal insertion lamp 1). 29 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 (an external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 through an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. . The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-controller 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 and an effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 156 are connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as “liquid crystal display device 157”). The second sub-controller 500 may be composed of a plurality of controllers, such as a controller that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a controller that controls various driving devices for effects (for example, a controller that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-controller 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on this control command. is equipped with The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. FIG. 46 is a plan view showing the layout of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (nine types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 0 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 1 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 0 on the right reel 112 has a "replay pattern".

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 47 shows the types of winning combinations, names of conditional devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and remarks.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2), a general combination (replay combination 1 to 3, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. It should be noted that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted, and some of the winning combinations are omitted in FIG.

<Types of Winning Roles/Special Roles>
Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals (a combination to which a replay is awarded). These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands".

Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not involve the payout of medals (does not involve the payout of medals) is displayed on the winning line.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are winning combinations in which the game state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) by internal winning, and the game state shifts to the special combination 1/2 game state (RT4) by winning. In addition, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out in the special combination 1/2 game state (RT4), the game state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). Each game state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 pattern - Seven 1 pattern - Seven 1 pattern" or "Seven 2 pattern - Seven 2 pattern - Seven 2 pattern", and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2 (RB) is "BAR pattern - BAR pattern - BAR pattern".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the pattern combination corresponding to the special role is easily won all together.

<Types of Winning Roles/Replay Roles>
The re-playing hands 1 to 3 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. Corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. The replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when the replay role is won, the medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in the medal insertion number storage area), or the medals inserted in the game in which the replay role was won may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

<Types of Winning Roles/Small Roles>
Small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a payout number).

A small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which a symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and 5 medals are paid out.

The small combination 2 (cherry) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and two medals are paid out. The symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" indicates that the symbol of the left reel 110 is "cherry symbol", and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

Hereinafter, these small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and small winning combination 2 (cherry) may be collectively referred to as "rare combination", but the rare combination is not limited to these winning combinations, and may be either one of the winning combinations or another winning combination.

If a rare combination is won in the AT state, which will be described later, a lottery for increasing the number of games or increasing the number of sets is executed (making it easier to win the lottery). On the other hand, even if a rare combination is won in the ED state, a lottery for increasing the number of games or increasing the number of sets is not executed. As shown in FIG. 48, the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) consists of 6 types of winning combinations of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f. In this example, by lottery, with a predetermined probability (in this example, about 1/6; common to all settings), one of the small wins 3a to 3f is internally won, and if the operation order (pressing order) of stop operations by the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches the correct pressing order corresponding to the internally won winning combination, a prize is won and 12 medals are paid out (details will be described later using FIG. 48).

A small winning combination 4 (common bell) is a winning combination in which a symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed on the prize-winning line L1 and 12 medals are paid out regardless of the operation order (pushing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137-139.

A small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is a winning combination in which a pattern combination of ``replay pattern-replay pattern-blank 1 pattern'' is stop-displayed on a prize-winning line L1 and one medal is paid out regardless of the operation order (pushing order) or operation timing of stop operations by stop buttons 137-139.

<Small role 3 (push order bell) and AT game>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the relationship between the small win 3 (push order bell) and the AT game will be described.

FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combination, the number of payouts, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) and the small combination 5 (one-piece combination), and FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the pushing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won and the AT game.

The small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) consists of 6 types of prize winning combinations of a small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR), a small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC), a small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL), a small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC), a small winning combination 3e (pushing order bell CLR), and a small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL).

When a small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won, it is decided according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139 which symbol combination is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and whether the AT game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Although the details will be described later, in this example, among the six types of pressing order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, 12 medals are paid out for the four types of the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC), the small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL), the small winning combination 3e (pushing order bell CLR), and the small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL) when the stop operation is performed according to the irregular pressing that is the correct operation order. Therefore, when a minor winning combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won, if the stopping operation is performed according to the irregular pressing, the small winning combination (push order bell) is won with a probability of 4/6, and the game in which the stopping operation is performed according to the irregular pressing becomes a "high base game" in which the number of obtained medals is relatively large.

On the other hand, in the present example, among the six kinds of pressing order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, 12 medals are paid out for the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR) when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order of forward pressing, and 12 medals are paid out for the small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC) when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order of scissors striking. Therefore, when a small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won, if a stop operation is performed in accordance with forward pressing or scissor hitting, a small winning combination (push order bell) is won with a probability of 2/6, and a game in which the stop operation is performed in accordance with forward pressing or scissor hitting is a "low base game" in which the number of acquired medals is relatively small.

The six types of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f will be specifically described below.

<Small role 3a (pushing order bell LCR)>
When a small win 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell LCR) and stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, order push (LCR)), the symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

On the other hand, when a small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR) is internally elected and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, scissors striking (LRC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, when a small win 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally elected, and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular push (CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

Here, ``the AT game is disadvantageous'' means ``the ease of obtaining game value in the AT game is disadvantageous to the player''. For example, in a game in which a stop operation is performed by an irregular push in a normal game, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of the AT game is reduced, the number of times of irregular push makes the initial number of games and the probability of winning the AT game disadvantageous. When the irregular push is performed, the point lottery becomes disadvantageous, the winning probability of the AT lottery is lowered in the game in which the stop operation is performed by the irregular push in the normal game, the execution frequency of the operation navigation in the AT game is lowered, the set continuation lottery is not executed in the AT game, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery is lowered in the AT game. On the other hand, "AT game becomes advantageous" means "making the ease of acquisition of game value in AT game advantageous for the player".

As described above, in this example, if the forward pressing (LCR) or the scissors hitting (LRC) is performed when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the AT game is advantageous, and if the small winning combination 3 is internally winning, the AT game is disadvantaged if the irregular pressing (CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. ) does not change the advantage of the AT game, and if the irregular push (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL) is performed when the small win 3 is internally won, the AT game may be disadvantageous. ), the advantage of the AT game may not change.

<Small role 3b (Push order bell RLC)>
When a small win 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell) and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (RLC)), the symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, when a small win 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally elected, and stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, the symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, when a small combination 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally elected, and stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular push (CLR, CRL, RCL)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

<Small role 3c (pushing order bell CRL)>
When a small win 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (CRL)), the symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, when a small win 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally elected, and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, when a small winning combination 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally elected and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (CLR, RLC, or RCL)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

<Small win 3d (pushing order bell LRC)>
When a small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC) is internally won out of the small winning combination 3 (push order bell LRC) and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, scissors striking (LRC)), the symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

On the other hand, when a small win 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally elected and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, the symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, when a small win 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally elected and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular push (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" is stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

<Small role 3e (pushing order bell CLR)>
When a small win 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell) and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (CLR)), the symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally elected, and out of a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC)) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, when a small win 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally elected and stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular push (CRL, RLC, or RCL)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

<Small win 3f (push order bell RCL)>
When a small win 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell) and stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (RCL)), the symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, when a small combination 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally elected, and stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, when a minor win 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally elected and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular push (CRL, CLR, or RLC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous.

In this example, one medal is paid out when one of the small wins 3a to 3f is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of incorrect operation, but the number of payouts is not limited to one.

<Small role 5 (1 sheet role)>
Next, the relationship between the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination) and the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. 48(a) and 48(c).

FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combination, the number of payouts, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (one-card combination), and FIG.

When the small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is internally won, the small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out regardless of the operation order (pushing order) or the operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, but it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion performance A can be executed according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139.例文帳に追加

As a specific example, when a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is internally won and a stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC) in this example), a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is won, one medal is paid out, and the setting suggestion performance A becomes executable.

On the other hand, when a small winning combination 5 (1 winning combination) is internally won and a stop operation is performed according to an operation order other than a predetermined operating order (in this example, irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL)), a small winning combination 5 (1 winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, but the setting suggestion performance A is not executed.

In this example, when a small winning combination 5 (1-piece winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular pressing, the setting suggestion effect A is rendered unexecutable. However, when the small winning combination 5 (1-piece winning combination) is internally won, operation navigation may be displayed, and when a stop operation not following the operation navigation is performed (when a stop operation is performed ignoring the operation navigation), the setting suggestion effect A may be rendered unexecutable.

Also, in this example, when the small winning combination 5 is internally won and the stop operation is performed by irregular pressing, one medal is paid out, but the number of payouts is not limited to one and may be zero.

Here, the setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the currently set setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) using effect elements in the slot machine 100, and the setting suggesting effect A and the setting suggesting effect B, which will be described later, are one of the setting suggesting effects.

The effect elements used for the setting suggestion effect are not particularly limited, but for example, display by display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43), sound output from sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45), light output from light output means (for example, backlight of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 43, lamps such as side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 43), and movable bodies (for example, shutter (shielding) shown in FIG. Device) 163) (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement), etc. correspond to this.

In this example, when the stop operation is performed in an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (irregular pressing in this example), the setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, although the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is the same as when the stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), even if the setting suggestion effect has a lower execution frequency of a setting suggesting effect (for example, an effect including a display such as "setting 5 confirmed") (for example, a effect that vaguely suggests a setting value (for example, an effect including a display such as "setting 5? setting 6?") is executed more frequently). Good.

Further, the execution frequency of the setting suggesting performance A may be lower than when the stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), and the performance of definitely suggesting the set value may also be executed less frequently.

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based game state (hereinafter also referred to as a "normal game state") that is initially set immediately after power-on of the slot machine 100, and is a game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player compared to other game states.

In this example, in the low replay probability state (RT1), when a replay combination 2 (promoted replay 1) or a replay combination 3 (promoted replay 2) is won, the state shifts to a replay high probability state (RT2) to be described later. Also, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) to be described later.

<Replay High Probability State (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) to be described later.

<Special roles 1 and 2 internal elected state (RT3)>
A special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which an internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 or 2 is set to ON, and is a game state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed by a player's stop operation at a predetermined timing.

In this example, in this special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won, the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In this example, in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered.

In this example, the condition for ending the special game state (RT4) is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a case where a predetermined win is internally won, a predetermined number of wins (e.g., 8 times), or a predetermined number of times (e.g., 6 times) of games are played.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be explained.

The game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. A low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, or a normal section. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low navigation state.
It is also called AT mode or advantageous section.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect for notifying the stop operation mode (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state.

When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, the result is advantageous to the player, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically means that the ratio of the total number of game media put out by the game machine to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing a game for a predetermined period, that is, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate) is advantageous.

In this example, the low-navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation-navigation is low, and the high-navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation-navigation is higher than in the low-navigation state.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. Specifically, the performance state of the low-navigation state includes a normal game state, and the performance state of the high-navigation state includes a normal state, a fixed announcement state, a judge state, a withdrawal state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an ED (ending) state. Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED state are, in principle, states in which the ball output increases.

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the normal game state of the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, for example, there is a route of shifting in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→judging state, and from this judging state, there is a route of shifting to a normal game state or AT2 state via a pullback state, or a route of shifting directly from the judge state to the AT2 state.

The AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a state in which the AT game can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games in one set), and is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state in the low navigation state or the normal state in the high navigation state.

In this AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game in the start game of the AT game, and when the set continuation lottery is won, the AT game of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 games per set) is given to extend the AT state. Also, when the condition for shifting to the normal game state is established in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the next game shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), it shifts to an ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) performance suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to a predetermined number of games remaining in the high navigation state (for example, 20 games) or less.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A>
Next, setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game periods of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. FIG.

In this example, in the advantageous section, when the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 wins a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), the setting suggesting effect A lottery using the setting suggesting effect A selection table described later is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A becomes executable.

When it is decided to execute the setting suggesting performance A by the setting suggesting performance A lottery, the suggesting performance suggesting that the setting suggesting performance A will be executed is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, when the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 wins a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL)) Stop button 137-139 is stopped, the setting suggestion effect A lottery is not executed, so the setting suggestion effect A and the suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A will be executed. , do neither.

In this example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward press (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC)), the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed when the small win 5 (single win) is internally won, and the stop button 13 is executed in a predetermined operation order. 7 to 139 may be performed, or regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, it may be performed when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a winning combination of 1) is won, or when a predetermined number of medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, when one medal is paid out by irregular pressing).

In addition, if a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is internally won and stop operation is performed by forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC), one medal is paid out, if the small winning combination 5 is internally won and stop operation is performed by irregular pressing, medals are not paid out, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A lottery may be determined according to the number of medals to be paid out when the small winning combination 5 is internally won.

In other words, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery may be internal winning of a small winning combination of 5 (one winning combination) and payout of one medal.

The setting suggestion performance A lottery in this example has two types, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the setting suggestion performance A has a higher execution probability than the low probability mode.

The conditions for starting the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), when the low-navigation state (normal section) transitions to the high-navigation state (advantageous section), the high-probability mode is set for a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example). In this high-probability mode, when a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) have passed without execution of the setting suggestion effect A, the next game is shifted to the low-probability mode. On the other hand, in the high-probability mode, when the setting suggestion performance A is executed before the predetermined number of games (10 games) has passed (the eighth game in this example), the game next to the game in which the setting suggestion performance A is executed is shifted to the low-probability mode.

Conventionally, when the AT state, ED state, etc., ends, the state immediately transitions from the high navigation state (advantageous section) to the low navigation state (normal section) and then to the high navigation state (advantageous section). Therefore, when the low navigation state (normal section) transitions to the high navigation state (advantageous section), there are many players who immediately end the game (immediately quit). By setting a period of a high-probability mode with a high performance execution probability, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game immediately (immediately quit) when shifting from a low-navigation state (normal section) to a high-navigation state (advantageous section), and improve the operating rate.

The conditions for setting the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, and for example, the high-probability mode may be set when the player is defeated in the confrontation performance, the high-probability mode may be set when the CZ or the sign performance fails (the bonus or AT is not won), the high-probability mode may be set when a predetermined winning combination is won, and the high-probability mode may be set when the lottery is won.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A Selection Table>
FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect A selection table used for the setting suggestion effect A lottery.

The setting suggesting effect A lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggesting effect A is to be executed, and if it is to be executed, the effect contents of the setting suggesting effect A. In this example, when execution of the setting suggesting performance A is determined by the lottery, the setting suggesting performance A is executed in the next game after executing the suggesting performance suggesting the execution of the setting suggesting performance A in the game in which the lottery is executed.

The game for executing the setting suggestion performance A is not limited to the next game after the game for which the setting suggestion performance A lottery is executed, but may be the game for which the setting suggestion performance A lottery is executed or the game after the next game. Also, the game in which the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggesting effect A lottery is executed, and may be before the setting suggesting effect A is executed.

Of the ``performance contents'' in the setting suggesting performance A selection table shown in FIG. 49(b), ``no execution'' indicates that the setting suggesting performance A is not executed, and the other performance contents indicate the performance contents of the setting suggesting performance A to be executed.

In the setting suggestion effect A, the effect is performed using the display by the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43) and the sound output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45) among the plurality of types of effect elements.

The effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect A may be of a plurality of types, such as display by display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43), sound output from sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45), light output from light output means (for example, backlight of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 43, lamps such as side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 43), and movable bodies (for example, shutters (shielding devices shown in FIG. 43). ) 163) (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement), etc. can be arbitrarily combined.

The effect content "even number suggesting image" is a effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 157 an image suggesting that the setting value may be an even number (in this example, one of setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), and outputting a sound suggesting that the setting value may be an even number from the speakers 272 and 277 as the setting suggesting effect A.

The effect content "odd number suggesting image" is a effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 157 an image suggesting that the setting value may be an odd number (in this example, one of setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5) and outputting a sound suggesting that the setting value may be an odd number from the speakers 272 and 277 as setting suggesting effect A.

The effect content "high setting suggesting image" is a effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 157 an image suggesting that the set value may be set to a high setting (setting 5 or setting 6 in this example) as the setting suggesting effect A, and outputting a sound suggesting that the set value may be set to a high setting from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is an effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 157 an image suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be an even number (in this example, one of setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) and outputting a sound suggesting that the setting value is confirmed to be an even number from the speakers 272 and 277 as setting suggestion effect A.

The effect content "4 or more confirmed image" is a effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 157 an image suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 4 or more (in this example, any of setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6) and outputting a sound suggesting that the setting value is confirmed to be 4 or more from the speakers 272 and 277 as the setting suggestion effect A.

The effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is a setting suggesting effect A in which an image suggesting that the set value is set at 5 or more (setting 5 or 6 in this example) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound suggesting that the set value is set at 5 or more is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The performance content "6 confirmed image" is a performance of displaying an image suggesting that the set value is set at 6 on the liquid crystal display device 157 and outputting a voice suggesting that the set value is set at 6 from the speakers 272 and 277 as the setting suggesting performance A.例文帳に追加

Note that the content of the setting suggesting effect is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, an effect that vaguely suggests the setting value (for example, a effect including display and sound such as “Setting 5?

<Setting Suggestion Effect A / Low Probability Mode>
In the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, lottery data corresponding to the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A selection table are referred to, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A is determined based on the current set value, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance A are determined when it is executed.

For example, when the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed. When the current setting value is the setting 2, ``no execution'' is selected with a probability of 99% and the setting suggestion performance A is not executed, and the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``even number setting fixed image'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current set value is set 4, ``no execution'' is selected with a probability of 98% and the setting suggestion performance A is not executed, with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``even number setting fixed image'' is performed, and with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``4 or more fixed image'' is performed.

When the current set value is set to 5, ``no execution'' is selected with a probability of 98% and the setting suggestion performance A is not executed, with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``4 or more fixed image'' is performed, and with a 1% probability, the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``5 or more fixed image'' is performed.

When the current setting value is set to 6, there is a 96% probability that ``no execution'' is selected and setting suggestion effect A is not executed, with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``even number setting confirmed image'' is performed, with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``4 or more confirmed image'' is performed, with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``5 or more confirmed image'' is performed, and with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``6 confirmed image'' is performed. execute.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A / High Probability Mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A selection table are referred to, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance A are determined based on the current set values. In the high-probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect A is always executed.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the setting suggesting performance A of the performance contents ``even number suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 47%, the setting suggesting performance A of the performance content ``odd number suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 47%, and the setting suggesting performance A of the performance content ``high setting suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 6%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content ``even number suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 56%, the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content ``odd number suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 38%, the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content ``high setting suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 5%, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content ``even number setting fixed image'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current setting value is the setting 3, the setting suggesting performance A of the performance contents ``even number suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 37%, the setting suggesting performance A of the performance content ``odd number suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 55%, and the setting suggesting performance A of the performance content ``high setting suggesting image'' is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current setting value is set to 4, there is a 54% probability that setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``even number suggestive image'' is executed, with a 34% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``odd number suggestive image'' is executed, with an 8% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``high setting suggestive image'' is executed, with a 3% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``even number setting confirmed image'' is executed, and with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content ``4 or more confirmed image'' is executed. to run.

When the current setting value is set to 5, there is a 31% probability that setting suggestion effect A with effect content "even number suggestive image" will be executed, with a 58% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "odd number suggestive image" will be executed, with a 9% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "high setting suggestive image" will be executed, with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "4 or more confirmed image" will be executed, and with a 1% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "5 or more confirmed image" will be executed. execute.

When the current setting value is set to 6, there is a 51% probability that setting suggestion effect A with effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed, with a 29% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "odd number suggestive image" is executed, with a 10% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "high setting suggestive image" is executed, with a 5% probability setting suggestion effect A with effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is executed, and with a 2% probability setting suggestion effect with effect content "4 or more confirmed image" is executed. A is executed, setting suggestion performance A of performance content ``5 or more confirmed image'' is performed with a probability of 2%, and setting suggestion performance A of performance content ``6 confirmed image'' is performed with a probability of 1%.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that the execution probability of the effect vaguely suggesting the set value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. By doing so, even in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

In the low-probability mode, since the execution probability itself is extremely low, when it is executed, the execution probability of the effects that vaguely suggest the setting value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is lowered to prevent the setting value from being too difficult to guess.

A second feature of the setting suggesting performance A selection table is that the setting suggesting performance A is more likely to be executed in the cases of setting 4 to 6 than in the case of setting 1 to 3 in the low probability mode. By doing so, the performance giving a good impression is executed when the execution probability itself is extremely low in the low-probability mode (because the performance giving a good impression is likely to be executed in the case of setting 4 to setting 6), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the selection probability shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in settings 1 to 3 of the low-probability mode, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in the high-probability mode, it was always executed, but it may not be executed.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B>
Next, setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game periods of the high-probability mode and low-probability mode of setting suggestion effect B. FIG.

In this example, in the AT state or the ED state of the advantageous section, when a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 1 (watermelon) or a small combination 2 (cherry)) is internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is depressed (lever ON), regardless of the operation order (pushing order) or the operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, the setting suggestion presentation B lottery using the setting suggestion presentation B selection table to be described later is executed, and the setting suggestion presentation B selection table described later becomes executable.

The setting suggestion performance B lottery of this example has two types, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the probability of executing the setting suggestion performance B is higher than the low probability mode.

The conditions for starting the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. Therefore, in this example, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the ED state is higher than the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state. It should be noted that the execution frequency of the setting suggesting effect B in the AT state may be set to 0%, and the setting suggesting effect B may not be executed in the AT state.

Also, in this example, the execution period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B (20 games+α in this example) is at least longer than the execution period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A (10 games in this example).

As will be described later in detail, in the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, when a rare combination is won, the setting suggestion performance B is always executed, so it can be said that the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B has a higher execution probability of the setting suggestion performance than the low probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance A is extremely low.

In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, even if the setting suggestion performance B is executed before the predetermined number of games (20 games +α) has passed, the high-probability mode is continued until the conditions for ending the ED state are met, and when the conditions for ending the ED state are met and the high-navigation state (advantageous section) shifts to the low-navigation state (normal section), the setting-suggestion performances including the setting suggestion performances A and B are not executed, and the setting suggestion performances including the setting suggestion performances A and B are not executed, and the low-navigation state (normal section) returns to the high-navigation state (advantageous section). In the case of shifting, the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect A is set.

According to this example, by providing the period of the high-probability mode in which the execution probability of setting suggestion performance is high, which is different from the period of the low-probability mode, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game immediately after the period of the low-probability mode (immediately quit), and to improve the operating rate.

In addition, in the ED state, even if a rare role is won, no extra lottery is executed, so the player feels lost even if the rare role is won.

The period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B to the start of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A (the period shown as the normal section in FIG. 50(a)) is preferably shorter than the period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A to the start of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B Selection Table>
FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

The setting suggesting effect B lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggesting effect B is to be executed, and if it is to be executed, the effect contents of the setting suggesting effect B. In this example, when it is determined by the lottery that the setting suggestion effect B is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect B is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

The game in which the setting suggestion effect B is executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed, and may be a game after the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed.

Of the ``performance contents'' in the setting suggesting performance B selection table shown in FIG. 50(b), ``no execution'' indicates that the setting suggesting performance B is not executed, and the other performance contents indicate the performance contents of the setting suggesting performance B to be executed.

In the setting suggestion effect B, the effect is performed using only the sound output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45) among the plurality of types of effect elements.

The number of effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect B may be one or more as long as they are fewer than the effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect A. Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43), sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45), light output from the light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 43, and the lamps such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 43). , movement (eg, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (eg, shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 43), etc., one, a plurality, or all of them can be arbitrarily selected.

Also, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B is the same as the effect using the sound output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45) among the effect contents of the setting suggestion effect A described with reference to FIG.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B / Low Probability Mode>
In the low probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table are referred to, and based on the current set value, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance B, and if it is to be executed, the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance B are determined.

For example, when the current set values are set 1 to set 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect B is not executed. When the current set value is set 4, ``no execution'' is selected with a probability of 99% and the setting suggestion performance B is not executed, and the setting suggestion performance B of performance contents ``4 or more fixed voice'' is performed with a probability of 1%.

When the current set value is set to 5, ``no execution'' is selected with a probability of 98% and the setting suggestion performance B is not executed, with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance B of performance contents ``4 or more fixed voice'' is performed, and with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance B of the performance content ``5 or more fixed voice'' is performed.

When the current set value is set to 6, ``no execution'' is selected with a probability of 97% and the setting suggestion performance B is not executed, with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance B of the performance content ``4 or more fixed voice'' is performed, with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance B of the performance content ``5 or more fixed voice'' is performed, and with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion performance B of the performance content ``6 fixed voice'' is performed.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B / High Probability Mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table are referred to, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance B are determined based on the current set values. In the high-probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect B is always executed.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``even number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 38%, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``odd number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 57%, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 5%.

When the current setting value is the setting 2, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``even number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 57%, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``odd number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 38%, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 5%.

When the current set value is the setting 3, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``even number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 37%, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``odd number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 55%, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current set value is the setting 4, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``even number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 54%, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``odd number suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 36%, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 8%, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``4 or more fixed voice'' is executed with a probability of 2%.

If the current setting value is set to 5, there is a 34% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestive voice", with a 51% probability, the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed, with a 10% probability, the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "high setting suggestive voice" is executed, with a 3% probability, the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" is executed, and with a 2% probability, the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed. to run.

If the current setting value is set to 6, there is a 49% probability of executing setting suggestion B with the production content "even-number suggesting voice", with a 33% probability, setting suggestion B with the production content "odd-number suggesting voice" is executed, with a 10% probability, setting suggestion B with the production content "high setting suggesting voice" is executed, with a 3.5% probability, setting suggestion performance B with the production content "4 or more confirmed voice" is executed, and with a 2.5% probability the setting suggestion effect B with the production content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed. The setting suggesting performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content "6 fixed voice" is executed with a probability of 2%.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that the probability of execution of the effect vaguely suggesting the set value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. By doing so, even in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

In the low-probability mode, since the execution probability itself is extremely low, when it is executed, the execution probability of the effects that vaguely suggest the setting value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is lowered to prevent the setting value from being too difficult to guess.

A second feature of the setting suggesting performance B selection table is that the setting suggesting performance A is more likely to be executed in the cases of setting 4 to 6 than in the case of setting 1 to 3 in the low probability mode. By doing so, the performance giving a good impression is executed when the execution probability itself is extremely low in the low-probability mode (because the performance giving a good impression is likely to be executed in the case of setting 4 to setting 6), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the selection probability shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in settings 1 to 3 of the low-probability mode, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in the high-probability mode, it was always executed, but it may not be executed.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value for the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition setting, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314 and initial value setting are performed.

In step S102, bet number setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery processing, a winning combination lottery table stored in a ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, an internal lottery is performed using this table and the obtained random number, and preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result of the internal lottery to the first sub-control part 400.例文帳に追加As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the effect state control processing relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, control of various effects and the like are performed.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In reel stop control processing, it is possible to accept stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pushed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to stop one of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawing frames set in the stop table in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pushed stop button. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a stop button reception command related to the stopped stop buttons 137 to 139 for each stop operation (specifically, a stop button reception 1 command for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 2 command for the second stop operation, and a stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for each reel stop, a reel stop command for the reel stop position (specifically, for the first stop reel, a reel stop 1 command, Preparations are made to transmit a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation and a reel stop 3 command for the third stop operation to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, an effect state control process relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state ending process for ending the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 52) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment).

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the signals are stored in the signal state storage areas provided separately for each sensor 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control part 400, it is possible to determine the performance control according to the change of the game control in the main control part 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and to determine the performance control contents based on the information of the command data included in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and when an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 52 is performed.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 53(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 53(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 53(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 includes a command to the various lamps 420, the drive circuit 422
output to

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG. In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 53(c). The first sub-controller 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 53(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 54(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 54(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 54(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 54(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 54(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S606 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then sets an instruction to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903, and if not, it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 of image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) forming the display image. V.
The DP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

A performance example 1 shows a performance example when a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in a game in which a low-probability mode of the setting suggestive presentation A is set.

The state shown in FIG. 55(a) is the state before the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on).

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a character C1 (a character of Sabohani in this example) indicating that the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 55(b) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). In this example, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination).

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A / forward press>
The state shown in FIG. 55(c) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been stopped by forward pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggesting performance A can be executed, the setting suggesting performance A lottery using the setting suggesting performance A selection table is executed, and the setting suggesting performance A is determined to be executed by the lottery.

Further, since it is decided to execute the setting suggesting performance A in the next game, a character C2 imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a suggesting performance suggesting that the setting suggesting performance A will be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 55(d) is a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game. In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, a moving picture PD1 (4 or more confirmed image) in which rice pops out from an opened treasure box is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A (4 or more confirmed sound) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. However, according to this example, by executing the setting suggestion performance A in the low-base game, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous, and the set value can be suggested, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A / irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 55(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), and the state shown in FIG.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in an operation sequence (irregular pressing) in which the setting suggesting effect A cannot be executed, neither the setting suggesting effect A (in this example, the animation PD1) nor the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed (character C2 in this example) is executed.

If the setting suggesting performance A is executed by the irregular pushing that becomes the high base game, the player can detect the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted, but according to this example, since the setting suggesting performance A is not executed in the irregular pushing that becomes the high base game, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting performance A from being executed by the high base game, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low base game.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing example 2 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

A performance example 2 shows a performance example when a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in a game in which the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A is set.

The state shown in FIG. 56(a) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed (lever ON).

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a character C3 (in this example, a Savohani character covered with an aura image) is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, suggesting that the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set.
In this example, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination).

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / forward press>
The state shown in FIG. 56(b) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been stopped by forward pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggesting performance A can be executed, the setting suggesting performance A lottery using the setting suggesting performance A selection table is executed, and the setting suggesting performance A is determined to be executed by the lottery.

Further, since it is decided to execute the setting suggesting performance A in the next game, a character C2 imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a suggesting performance suggesting that the setting suggesting performance A will be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 56(c) is a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.

In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, a moving image PD2 (5 or more confirmed image) in which a panda character jumps out of an opened treasure box is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A (5 or more confirmed sound) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. However, according to this example, by executing the setting suggestion performance A in the low-base game, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous, and the set value can be suggested, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

FIG. 56(d) shows a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is terminated and the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is shifted to the low probability mode.

In this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed after the display of the setting suggestion effect A has started, the setting suggestion effect A is ended, the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the character C1 (Sabohani character in this example) is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 56(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), and the state shown in FIG.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in an operation sequence (irregular pressing) in which the setting suggesting effect A cannot be executed, neither the setting suggesting effect A (in this example, the animation PD2) nor the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed (character C2 in this example) is executed.

If the setting suggesting performance A is executed by the irregular pushing that becomes the high base game, the player can detect the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted, but according to this example, since the setting suggesting performance A is not executed in the irregular pushing that becomes the high base game, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting performance A from being executed by the high base game, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low base game.

In this example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is continued, and the character C3 (in this example, a character of Sabohani covered with an aura image) indicating that the high-probability mode is set continues to be displayed. It may be configured to

In addition, in the setting suggestion performance A of this example, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion performance A is also differentiated according to the setting suggestion image, but the common BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion performance A may be output regardless of which setting suggestion image is displayed. That is, in this case, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is the BGM for notifying that the setting suggestion effect A is being executed.

Also, the setting suggestion effect A of this example is not executed in the AT state or the ED state, but it may be executed in the AT state or the ED state.

<Production example of setting suggestion production B>
Next, an example of setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the setting suggestion effect B in chronological order.

This example of performance shows an example of performance when a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery at the time of depressing operation (lever ON) of a start lever 135 in a game in which a high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B is set.

The states shown in FIGS. 57(a) to 57(c) are AT states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 201 games, and the speakers 272 and 277 output BGM during AT.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 14B, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 informs that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 200 games, and the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(c), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the shift to the ED state from the next game is notified, and BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

On the other hand, the states shown in FIGS. 57(d) to 57(f) are ED states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 57( d ), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 , the ED effect is executed and the BGM during the ED is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

In the state shown in the following figure (E), since the internal lottery (in this case, in this example, 1 (watermelon) in this case (watermelon)) was selected in the internal lottery at the time of the start lever 135 (lever -on), the setting suggestive production B selection table was executed, and the setting suggested production B was performed by the lottery. It is determined to execute, and as a setting suggestion B, the BGM for setting suggestions B (4 or more is 4 or more) from the speaker 272 and 277 (4 or more).

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(f), since a rare hand (small hand 2 (cherry) in this example) is internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever ON), the setting suggestion performance B lottery is executed using the setting suggestion performance B selection table, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion performance B by the lottery, and as the setting suggestion performance B, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion performance B (high setting suggestion sound in this example) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, by executing the setting suggestion effect B, it is possible to suggest the setting value, so that the player's interest can be heightened. In addition, since the setting suggestion performance B (second setting suggestion performance) suggesting the set value currently set, which is different from the setting suggestion performance A (first setting suggestion performance), can be executed, the variation of the setting suggestion performance can be increased, and the expectation and interest in the setting suggestion performance can be increased.

Further, according to this example, since there is a high possibility that the setting suggesting performance is executed more often than in the low probability mode of the setting suggesting performance, the setting suggesting performance can be prevented from being bothersome by performing the setting suggesting performance with a small number of performance elements. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other effects in the ED state, perform various effects, and improve the amusement of the game. In addition, in the ED state, even if a rare role is won, no extra lottery is executed, so the player feels lost even if the rare role is won.

In this example, in addition to the BGM during the ED, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion performance B is output from the speakers 272 and 277, but instead of the BGM during the ED, only the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion performance B may be output.

Also, the setting suggesting performance B of this example is executed in the AT state and the ED state, but it may be executed in states other than the AT state and the ED state, or may be executed only in the ED state.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 21) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 21) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and one of a plurality of set values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6). setting means (e.g., setting keys, setting switches) capable of setting set values; internal lottery means (e.g., winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 51) that derives the result of internal winning based on lottery information corresponding to the plurality of set values set by the setting means; ), game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing shown in FIG. 51) for imparting game values (for example, medals) according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means, game control means (for example, game state control processing shown in FIG. 51) capable of controlling the progress of the game and changing the ease with which game values are obtained, and effect control means (for example, first sub-control section 400 shown in FIG. 45) for executing effects according to the progress of the game. The game control means can set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (e.g., normal game state) and a second game state (e.g., AT state) different from the first game state, and terminates the first game state based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (e.g., winning an AT lottery) while the first game state is set. A second game state can be set, and the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after the first condition is satisfied is changed based on the result of the operation of the stop button by the player in the first game state. 3f (either of pressing order bell RCL)) is derived, when the stop button is operated by a first operation (for example, forward pressing (LCR), scissors striking (LRC)), the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern"), and in the game in which the first lottery result is derived, the stop button is subjected to a second operation (for example, irregular pressing (CLR, CR) L, RLC, or RCL)), the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern"), and the game value imparting means provides more game value when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 medals) than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 medal). When the first lottery result is derived in the first game state and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first lottery result is derived in the first game state and the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state set after the first condition is satisfied is more disadvantageous for the player than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. In a game where the stop operation is performed by pressing, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT games is reduced, the number of initial games and the probability of winning the AT are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular pushes, the point lottery is performed for each game, and the performance of the AT is determined according to the points. , does not execute the set continuation lottery in AT games, lowers the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in AT games, etc. (or always changes unfavorably), and the effect control means provides a first setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set value (for example, the setting suggestion effect A (animation PD) shown in FIG. 1) A gaming machine characterized by being means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect A (animation PD2) shown in FIG. 56(c).

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous, but by enabling execution of the setting suggestion performance in the low-base game, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous to the player, and to suggest the set value, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Note that the "condition for establishing the second condition" according to the present invention is not limited to internal winning of a winning combination, and may be winning a certain winning combination, transitioning to a certain gaming state (for example, an ED state in an advantageous section), winning a certain lottery, or executing a certain effect (for example, a continuous effect).

Further, the effect control means may be a means that does not execute (or may not execute) the first setting suggestion effect when the stop button is operated by the second operation even in a game in which the second condition is satisfied.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting detection by the high-base game from being performed, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low-base game.

Also, the second condition may include that a second lottery result (for example, a small winning combination of 5 (1-card winning combination)) is derived by the internal lottery means.

Since the winning hand for which the base is adjusted is only for adjusting the base, the winning probability cannot be changed to adjust the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance may become too high or too low. However, if the second condition includes that the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, it is possible to easily adjust the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance by using winning to a winning hand different from the winning hand for adjusting the base as the condition for executing the setting suggestion performance. .

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be an effect executable in the first game state.

Even if the first setting suggestion effect is executed during the AT, the advantage or disadvantage of the AT is already determined during the AT, and the timing is too late to encourage the low-base game, so it must be executed in the normal game. However, if the first setting-suggestion effect is made executable in the first game state, the first setting suggestion effect includes the effect of encouraging the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. It becomes possible to

Further, the effect control means may be a means capable of executing a second setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect B (4 or more confirmed voice) shown in FIG. 57(e)) which is different from the first setting suggestion effect and suggests the currently set value.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect, and to increase the expectation and interest in the setting suggesting effect.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 21) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 21) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and one set value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6). possible setting means (e.g., setting keys, setting switches); internal lottery means (e.g., winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 51) for deriving the result of internal winning based on lottery information corresponding to the plurality of set values set by the setting means; A gaming machine comprising an effect control means (for example, the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500 shown in FIG. 45) that executes an effect according to the progress of a technique, wherein the effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect A (video PD1) shown in FIG. 55(e), a setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 56(c), and a setting suggestion effect B (4 or more confirmed sound) shown in FIG. 57(e)) for a predetermined period of time. 43, sound output from sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45), light output from light output means (for example, backlight of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 43, lamps such as side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 43), and movable body (for example, shutter (shielding device) 16 shown in FIG. The gaming machine is characterized in that the motion (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical motion, etc.) of 3) is used to suggest the currently set value.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, it is possible to suggest the currently set setting value by the setting suggesting effect using the effect element, so that the player's interest can be increased and the operation rate can be improved.

In addition, the predetermined period includes a first period (for example, the low-probability mode period of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 49(a)) and a second period different from the first period (for example, 10 games after the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section (the high-probability mode period of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 49(a))), and the setting suggestion effect may be easier to be executed in the second period than in the first period. Note that the "first period" according to the present invention may be a period during which the setting suggestion effect is less likely to be executed than the "second period", and may be a period during which the setting suggestion is not executed.

With such a configuration, by providing the second period different from the first period and having a high execution probability of the setting suggestion performance, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game immediately after the end of the first period (immediately quit), and to improve the operating rate.

In addition, it is provided with a game control means (for example, game state control processing shown in FIG. 51) that controls the progress of the game and can change the ease of acquiring the game value, and the game control means is capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and the first condition is satisfied in the state in which the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the fact (for example, winning the AT lottery), and the second period may be set before the first period after the second game state is ended.

With such a configuration, after the second game state advantageous to the player is finished, by setting the second period in which the execution probability of the setting suggesting performance is high, it is possible to make it difficult to finish the game immediately after the second game state is finished (immediately quit), and the operating rate can be improved.

In addition, the predetermined period includes a third period different from the first period and the second period (for example, a period of 20 games in the ED state (high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B) shown in FIG. 50(a)), the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the third period than the first period (for example, the period of the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. The period is longer than the 0 game (the high-probability mode period of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 49(a)), and is longer than the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 57(e) and 57(f), the number of the production elements used in the 4 or more confirmed voices) may be less (for example, only the voices output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIGS. 57(e) and 57(f)).

With such a configuration, the third period is longer than the second period, and there is a high possibility that more setting suggesting performances will be executed than during the second period, so that setting suggesting performances can be prevented from being bothersome by performing the setting suggesting performances with fewer performance elements. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other effects during the third period, perform various effects, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to allow two-way communication. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main controller and the first sub-controller, the communication from the first sub-controller to the second sub-controller may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

<<Embodiment 3>>
The slot machine of Embodiment 3 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 80. FIG. In principle, the symbols shown in FIGS. 58 to 80 are used only for the description of this embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, the symbols shown in FIGS. 58 to 80 are given priority in the description of this embodiment. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, starts to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, a lottery determines whether or not a plurality of types of wins are internally won. This game machine advances a series of games in which game media are paid out and terminated if a predetermined payout condition is met, and the game is terminated without paying out game media if they are not met.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns (not shown) arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 so as to rotate inside the slot machine 100.例文帳に追加These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each of the reels 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp for notifying the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role which is one of the winning roles in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three cards are inserted (upper limit is three cards). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The chance button 196 is a button for production.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110-112.

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139.

In addition, light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are turned on to notify the player, and when performing various notifications described later, they may be turned on.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push".

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game and may be turned on when performing various notifications.

A performance device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting to the outside the sound of a speaker 272 provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 160.例文帳に追加The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a effect image display device 157 (not shown, liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 (not shown). appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player).

The effect image display device 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and displays for various notifications.

In addition to the liquid crystal display device, any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 notifies of predetermined information by lighting the lamp, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, lighting of the notification lamp 123 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, display devices, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 59 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below the main control board housing case 210. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (hereinafter also referred to as “setting key SW”, not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. The setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) and confirm setting values, which will be described later. Further, inside the body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as a “reset SW”) is provided that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing the switch. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 is open, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed. In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 70, etc.) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although the details will be described later, when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and when the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. The set value display device 101a is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized only when the front door 102 is open, and is difficult or impossible to be visually recognized when the front door 102 is closed.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower surface plate 264. A power supply device 252 having a power supply board is arranged above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. Furthermore, it has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off.

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. - 特許庁

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 .

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting the key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 58). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102 .

An optical open/close sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101, and a light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) indicating the closed detection state to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high level signal) indicating an open detection state to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is closed, the detection state is the closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is the open state, the detection state is the open detection state. The configuration of this detection means is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a hall element, or the like. Further, the open detection state and the closed detection state are not necessarily switched with opening and closing of the door body, and the detection state may be changed to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state, or conversely, the detection state may be changed to the open detection state even if the door body is in the closed state.

Above the display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and an upper speaker 272 are provided. Below the display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal tray 161.例文帳に追加Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control section 300 that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control section 400.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery for the winning combination, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.

The main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medals paid out from the medal payout device 180 at each interrupt time. (medal payout sensor, reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, open/close sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and detect an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into a game as medals to be inserted. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 for driving the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, and the game medal insertion lamp 1). 29, a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (eg, game state) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop to the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-controller 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Main control unit main processing>
The main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described below with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main processing of the main control unit according to the control program pre-stored in the ROM 306 .

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although the details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial setting, setting change, recovery process, and the like are performed.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, the presence or absence of insertion of medals is checked, and preparations are made to transmit an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-controller 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, and a replay state is entered, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, an internal winning combination lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery processing, a winning combination lottery table stored in a ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result of the internal lottery to the first sub-control part 400.例文帳に追加As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In reel stop control processing, it is possible to accept stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pushed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to stop one of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawing frames set in the stop table in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pushed stop button. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a stop button reception command related to the stopped stop buttons 137 to 139 for each stop operation to the first sub-control unit 400, and for each reel stop, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop command related to the stop position of the reel to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is established. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting processing>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, initialization is performed at startup. In the initialization at startup, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition setting, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314 and initial value setting, etc. are performed.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening) is determined based on the output from the open/close sensor, and if the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204, and if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process. In step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process.

In the recovery process of step S205, after executing the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power interruption (for example, the process of recovering the recovery data saved in the RAM 308 in the power interruption process of step S411 of the main controller timer interrupt process), the initialization process ends.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Although the details will be described later, in this setting change processing, processing related to setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, the initialization process is finished after executing the process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear), the process related to the initial operation, and the like.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, a process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, a setting change start command indicating to start setting change is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S303, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in a state in which some error is detected (hereinafter referred to as each error detection state), and if there is such an error, the process proceeds to step S305, and if not, the process proceeds to step S306.

Errors handled in this embodiment include hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion abnormalities 2 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, prize winning abnormality, and the like. These errors are described below. Door opening (door open error) is not handled as an error, but may be handled as an error.

A hopper empty error (hopper error) is a payout error relating to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the hopper is replenished with medals equal to or more than the prescribed number (after the error is not detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (selector error) occurs when inserted medals stay in the medal selector or the like (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected). Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is greater than or equal to a specified number (becomes an error detection state), and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing (error detection state). Medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when inserted medals do not pass normally through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 (error detection state). Error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error has been removed (after an error non-detection state has been established).

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). The medal payout error 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process (error detection state). Error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error has been removed (after an error non-detection state has been established).

An overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected). A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example). The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, excess dispensing error, illegal dispensing error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, RAM clearing error, shock sensor error, etc. The error notification for these errors can also be canceled by operating the error cancellation switch after removing the cause of the error.

In step S305, error notification start processing is executed. In this error notification start process, the main control section 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127 and transmits an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control section 400 . When a plurality of errors are detected in displaying the error code on the payout number display 127, the error code corresponding to one of them is displayed on the payout number display 127 according to the order of priority. Also, when a code corresponding to the door open is displayed on the payout number display 127, priority is given to the display of the error code.

In step S306, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S307, and if the operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S307, the current set value is changed. Specifically, the currently set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1 (returns to 1 if the value is 6).

In step S308, it is determined whether or not some kind of error notification is being executed (during each error notification). If each error notification is being performed, the process proceeds to step S309, and if each error notification is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not an error notification end condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S310, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S311. In this embodiment, when the cause of the error currently being reported has been eliminated (error non-detected state) and the execution period of the error notification exceeds the period of one cycle of the error sound, it is determined that the error notification end condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, an error sound is output for error notification, and this error sound includes an announcement voice for notifying the content of the error, and the above conditions are for outputting this announcement sound at least once for error notification. With this configuration, the contents of the error can be notified to the outside more reliably.

In step S310, error notification end processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the error notification currently being executed is terminated. Specifically, the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 is erased, the error notification end command is transmitted, and the error display on the 7-segment (SEG) display is ended. If multiple errors are detected, the above processing is executed for the error with the highest priority, and the other errors remain unprocessed (only one error is subject to notification termination). If there is an error that has not been processed, the error code corresponding to the error with the highest priority is displayed on the payout number indicator 127. - 特許庁

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S312, and if the operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S312, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S313, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is received. However, it may be configured such that the set value is determined only when the front door 102 is in the open state by adding a determination process as to whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

At step S314, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in each error detection state.

In step S315, the same processing as in step S305 is executed.

In step S316, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If so, the process proceeds to step S317, and if not, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S317, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S318. If each error is not being being reported, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S318, it is determined whether or not an error notification end condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S319, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S319, the same process as in step S310 is executed.

At step S320, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S321. In step S321, a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment).

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt), so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected).

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the signals are stored in the signal state storage areas provided separately for each sensor 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>406 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control part 400, it is possible to determine the performance control according to the change of the game control in the main control part 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and to determine the performance control contents based on the information of the command data included in the output schedule information.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this device monitoring process, set value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 is set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process.

On the other hand, in step S411, information that needs to be saved, such as a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure, is saved as restoration data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, a checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power failure processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, after the set value confirmation process is performed, the process proceeds to step S502. Although the details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation processing, processing related to setting value confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the open detection state, stores open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308, displays a code indicating that the door is open on the payout number display 127, and prepares to transmit a door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When an error is detected, the display of the payout number indicator 127 is given priority to the error code.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, stores the closing detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected to be closed in the RAM 308, erases the door open code displayed on the payout number display 127, and prepares for transmitting a door closing detection command indicating that the front door 102 has been detected to be closed to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement processing, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the valid period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the start lever 135 is operated), and when a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, the main control unit 300 performs processing for settlement of the electronically accumulated medals and transmits a settlement command indicating that the medal settlement processing has been executed to the first sub-control unit 400. prepare for

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processes, the device monitoring process ends. Although the details will be described later, in the other device monitoring process, an error notification start process, an error notification end process, and the like are performed.

<Setting value confirmation processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing described with reference to FIG. 65 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being checked. If the set value is being checked, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being checked, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the setting value confirmation valid period, and if it is the setting value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not a MAX bet state (a state in which the number of medals that can start one game (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and an error is not being reported.

It should be noted that the conditions regarding the setting value confirmation effective period may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions, instead of all of the above conditions. Also, in the above conditions, there is a condition of "not in a max bet state", but it may be "not in a bet state".

At step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made to send a setting value confirmation start command indicating to start setting value confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this set value check start command from the main controller 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S606 during confirmation of the set value, it is determined whether or not the door is closed (the opening/closing sensor is in a closed detection state). If the door is closed, the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S607 during setting value confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is terminated to continue setting value confirmation, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value, and in the next step S609, preparations are made to transmit a setting value confirmation end command indicating to end the setting value confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting value confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error detection state (see the description of step S304) is present. If not each error detection state, other device monitoring processing ends, and if each error detection state is present, the process advances to step S702.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error reportable period, and if it is not an error reportable period, the other device monitoring process is ended, and if it is an error reportable period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error reportable period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If not, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S704, error notification start processing (similar to step S305) is executed.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (door is open). If the door is not open, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if the door is open, the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S707, and if the operation has not been performed, other device monitoring processing ends.

In step S707, it is determined whether or not the error notification termination condition is satisfied. If the error notification termination condition is not satisfied, the other device monitoring process is terminated. If the error notification termination condition (same as step S309) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, error notification end processing is executed (similar to step S310).

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 68(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 68(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S801, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing information representing the game state.

In step S803, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805.

In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S807, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. Here, out of the processes corresponding to this command process, the outline of the process when changing settings, the process when confirming set values, the process corresponding to the state of the open/close sensor, and the process relating to error detection will be described.

The main control unit 300 sends a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when setting change is started (step S302 in FIG. 43), and sends a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 when setting change is finished (step S321 in FIG. 63). When receiving the setting change start command, the first sub-control unit 400 emits light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode, and outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Also, a management screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 . The management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a store clerk to make various settings related to the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, various settings can be made using a cross button (not shown). Also, when a setting change end command is received, the above various outputs are ended.

The main control unit 300 transmits a setting value confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when starting setting value confirmation (step S605 in FIG. 66), and transmits a setting value confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 when finishing setting value confirmation (step S609 in FIG. 66). The first sub-controller 400 displays a management screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 when receiving the set value check start command. Also, when the setting value confirmation end command is received, the display of the management screen on the liquid crystal display device 157 is ended.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating an open detection state, transmits a door open detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and upon detecting a signal indicating a closed detection state, transmits a door closing detection command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S502 in FIG. 65). When receiving the door open detection command, the first sub-control unit 400 stores open detection information (in this example, information indicating “open” and date and time of opening) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and executes processing for starting door open notification. On the other hand, when the door closing detection command is received, closing detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and date and time of closing) is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and processing for ending the door open notification is executed.

In this embodiment, as door opening notification, light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and an opening sound (for example, "Door opening") is output from sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "Door is being opened" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

When the main control unit 300 detects an error, the main control unit 300 transmits an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400 (steps S305 and S315 in FIG. 63, step S704 in FIG. 67).

The first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting error notification when an error notification start command is received. In this example, when a selector error occurs, the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays a character string "Selector error has occurred!" The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112). When an error notification is performed by the sound output means and the light emitter, if a plurality of errors are detected, the error notification for one of the errors is performed according to the order of priority.

Also, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the error notification when the error notification end command is received. When executing error notification in the sound output means and the light emitting body, when a plurality of errors are detected, processing for ending the error notification is executed for the error with the highest priority, and the unprocessed state is maintained for the other errors (only one error is subject to termination of notification). If there are unhandled errors, the error notification corresponding to the highest priority error is executed.

The above error notification is executed with priority over the notification accompanying door opening, but the error notification may be configured to change when the door is opened, for example, by reducing the volume of the error sound (or not outputting it) when the door is opened. Further, execution of error notification is restricted during execution of setting change processing or confirmation of set values.

In step S809, effect control processing is performed. Here, performance data is expanded, device data is set in a performance execution area provided in a RAM 408, performance data is set in a performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and further, based on the received command and information included in the command, performance data is set, control processing is executed, and the like. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S811, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S813, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S815, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S817, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S809. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S803.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S821 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(c). The first sub-controller 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S831, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S803 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 68A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S833, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S815, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 69(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 69(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 69(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S901 of FIG. 69(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S903, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S907, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S909, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S907, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S911, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S909. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S909, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S903.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S915 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 69(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S917, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S903 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 69(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S919, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S911 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 69(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S921, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets an instruction to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S923, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S925, and if not, it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S925, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S921, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 of image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superposition and transparency, etc.) forming the display image. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S927, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S929, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S931, otherwise, it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S931, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation example≫
An operation example of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below.

[Example of operation when changing settings]
An example of the case where the setting is changed will be described below with reference to FIG. 70(A).

First, in FIG. 70(A)(1), the front door 1 of the slot machine 100 in the power off state is shown.
02 is opened, and the setting key SW is turned ON by the administrator of the game parlor. Note that when the power is off, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are in an off state, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) are in a non-output state, and the display means (effect image display device 157) is in a non-display state.

Next, FIG. 70(A)(2) shows the state when the power is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 70(A)(1) and turned on. The slot machine 100 is configured to execute a setting change process (step S206 in FIG. 62) when the power is turned on with the setting key SW in the ON state, and shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode).

In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 63), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), emits light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode, and executes processing for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 68). Further, a process (step S303 in FIG. 63) of displaying the current set value using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 70(A)(2) shows how the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

During execution of the setting change process (setting change mode), the currently set setting value is updated by adding 1 in the range of 1 to 6 each time the operation of the reset switch is detected, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the setting value is returned to 1. By repeating this process, the setting value can be changed (step S307 in FIG. 63). FIG. 70(A)(3) shows that the reset SW has been operated and that the number 1 indicating the setting 1 changed by this operation is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Furthermore, by operating the start lever 135, the set value is determined and the display on the set value display device 101a is turned off (steps S311 to S313 in FIG. 63). FIG. 70(A)(4) shows the state when the start lever 135 is operated from the state of FIG. 70(A)(3). If the setting key is in the OFF state after the start lever 135 is operated, this setting change process is terminated (step S320 in FIG. 63). At this time, a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is to end is transmitted (step S321 in FIG. 63), and the first sub-controller 400 that has received this command ends various outputs during the setting change (step S807 in FIG. 68).

Since the open/close sensor is in the open detection state immediately after the setting change is completed, a door open detection command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 (step S502 in FIG. 65). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 emits light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode as a door open notification, and outputs an opening sound (for example, "the door is being opened") from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). FIG. 70(A)(5) shows a state in which this door open notification is executed. The state when the setting key is turned off is shown. It should be noted that this state is a state of waiting for the player to start the game, and the effect image display device 157 executes processing for displaying a customer waiting effect (step S807 in FIG. 68).

[Operation example when setting value confirmation is executed]
An example of the case where setting value confirmation is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 70(B).

First, FIG. 70(B)(1) shows a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for a player to start playing) in the slot machine 100 in the power ON state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a customer waiting light emission mode, the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the customer waiting effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Next, FIG. 70(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 70(B)(1) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 65), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and executes a process of emitting light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 68). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the setting key SW is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 70(B)(2). FIG. 70(B)(3) shows the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured so that the current set value can be checked (set value confirmation mode) by turning on the setting key SW (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 66). In this state, a process (step S604 in FIG. 46) of displaying the current set values using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 70(B)(3) shows how the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Also, a set value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 66), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command executes processing for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 68). The output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained as the open sound, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained as the open light emission mode. The content displayed on the effect image display device 157 is configured to display the same screen as in the setting change mode, but may be configured to display a screen different from that in the setting change mode.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the setting key SW is turned off from the state shown in FIG. 70(B)(3). FIG. 70(B)(4) shows the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured such that the state in which the current set value can be checked (set value confirmation mode) is ended by turning the setting key SW OFF (determination of Yes in step S607 in FIG. 66). In this case, the display on the setting value display device 101a is turned off (step S608 in FIG. 66). Also, a control command for ending confirmation of set values is transmitted (step S609 in FIG. 66), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command terminates the display of the management screen in the effect image display device 157 and executes processing for displaying a customer waiting effect (step S807 in FIG. 68). In the state of FIG. 70(B)(4), the open/close sensor remains in the open detection state, so that the output of the opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained in the open light emission mode.

[Example of operation when front door 102 is closed during execution of setting change]
In the above [Example of operation when setting is changed], the operation in the state where the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. An example of the case where the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting change will be described below with reference to FIG. 71(A).

First, the states of FIGS. 71(A)(1) and 71(A)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 70(A)(1) and 70(A)(2), respectively. Further, FIGS. 71(A)(3) show the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 71(A)(2) and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. 71(A)(4) show the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 71(A)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state.

During execution of the setting change process (setting change mode) is before the start of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the state is not changed by the signal from the open/close sensor. That is, the execution state of the setting change process is maintained, and even if the front door 102 is closed during execution of the setting change process as shown in FIG. 71(A)(3), the execution state of the setting change process is maintained. Further, by opening the front door 102 again, the state shown in FIG. 71(A)(4) (same state as FIG. 71(A)(2)) is obtained, and the setting can be changed. Further, not only the execution state of the setting change process, but also the states of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.), sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and effect image display device 157 are maintained. Figures 71(A)(3) and 71(A)(4) show that the state of the device remains unchanged. It should be noted that the setting value display device 101a may be set to a non-display state when the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state.

[Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while confirming setting values]
In the above [Example of operation when confirmation of set value is executed], the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. An example of the case where the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation will be described below with reference to FIG. 71(B).

First, the states of FIGS. 71(B)(1) and 71(B)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 70(B)(1) and 70(B)(3), respectively. Further, FIG. 71(B)(3) shows the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 71(B)(2) and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. FIG. 71(B)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 71(B)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state.

During execution of the set value confirmation process (set value confirmation mode), the set value confirmation mode is terminated when the signal from the open/close sensor indicates the closed detection state, in the same way as when the setting key is turned off (determination of Yes in step S606 in FIG. 66). FIG. 71(B)(3) shows that the display on the setting value display device 101a is in a non-display state because the setting value confirmation mode is terminated while the setting key is in the ON state. It also shows that the state is the same as in FIG. 71(B)(1) except for the state of the setting key.

When the front door 102 is opened again from the state of (B) (3) in FIG. 71, the set value confirmation mode is started again because the setting key is already in the ON state (determination of Yes in step S603 in FIG. 66). FIG. 71(B)(4) shows that the state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 71(B)(2).

[Operation example (1) when setting key SW is ON]
In the above [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation], it has been explained that the setting value confirmation mode ends when the front door 102 is closed while the setting key is in the ON state. In this state, the game can be played while the setting key is in the ON state.

On the other hand, when the setting key is ON, the setting value confirmation mode can be started again by opening the front door 102 during the setting value confirmation effective period, but the setting value confirmation mode is not started during a period other than the setting value confirmation effective period. A specific description will be given below using the example of FIG. 72(A).

First, FIG. 72(A)(1) shows a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (playing) in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a play mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during the game, and the effect image display device 157 displays the effect during the game. The front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in the ON state. In this state, a game is played after the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is being executed.

FIGS. 72(A)(2) show the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 72(A)(1) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. Here, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (playing) and it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation mode is not executed (determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 66). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 65), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and executes a process of emitting light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 68). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the during-game effect is displayed is maintained.

Since the setting value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state of FIG. 72(A)(2), it is necessary to end the game at least once in order to execute the setting value confirmation mode. FIGS. 72(A)(3) show the situation when the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIGS. 72(A)(2) to return to the state shown in FIG. 72(A)(1), and then the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop the reels 110-112. In this example, a bell has been won, and a state in which the bell has been won is displayed in the in-game effect of the effect image display device 157 is shown. At this time, the luminous bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) perform an effect corresponding to the winning of the bell.

Next, FIG. 72(A)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 72(A)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. In this state, since it is the set value confirmation effective period, the set value confirmation mode is started again (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 66). FIG. 72(A)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71(B)(2) and 71(B)(4). 72(A)(3), even if the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state, the setting value confirmation valid period does not start, so even if the front door 102 is opened, the setting value confirmation mode is not started.

[Operation example (2) when setting key SW is ON]
In the above [Example of operation when setting key SW is ON (1)], an example in which the setting value confirmation mode is not started during a period other than the setting value confirmation valid period has been described even when the setting key is in the ON state. Further, an example different from FIG. 72(A) will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 72(B).

First, FIG. 72(B)(1) shows a state in which three medals are bet (inserted state, before the start of a game) in the slot machine 100 in a power-on state, light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a light emission mode during a game, BGM during a game is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and a customer waiting effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in the ON state. This state is a state in which a bet operation for starting a game is performed after the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is being executed.

FIG. 72(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 72(B)(1) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. Here, three medals have been bet (inserted state), and the setting value confirmation valid period is not yet in effect, so the setting value confirmation mode is not executed (determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 66). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 65), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and executes a process of emitting light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 68). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is maintained.

Since the setting value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state of FIG. 72(B) (2), in order to execute the setting value confirmation mode, it is necessary to cancel the entry state (to the non-entry state) by playing a game or operating the settlement button 134. 72(B)(3) show the situation when the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 72(B)(2) to return to the state shown in FIG. 72(B)(1), and then the settlement button 134 is operated to enter the non-input state.

Next, FIG. 72(B)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 72(B)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. In this state, since it is the set value confirmation effective period, the set value confirmation mode is started again (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 66). FIG. 72(B)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71(B)(2) and 71(B)(4).

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)]
An example of error cancellation will be described below with reference to FIG. 73(A).

First, FIG. 73(A)(1) shows a state in which a selector error is detected in the slot machine 100 in the power ON state. In this case, an error code ("CE" corresponding to a selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 67). , and the effect image display device 157 executes processing for displaying a screen notifying of a selector error (step S807 in FIG. 68).

Next, FIG. 73(A)(2) shows a state in which a hopper error is detected in addition to the selector error detected in FIG. 73(A)(1). That is, at this time, two types of errors are detected. When such a plurality of errors are detected, the payout number indicator 127 displays an error code for one of them in order of priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the payout number indicator 127 displays the selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 67), and error notification is executed by the first sub-controller 400 that received this error notification start command. Here, when a plurality of errors are detected in performing error notification by the sound output means or the light emitter, error notification is performed for one of the errors according to the order of priority. In this embodiment, a selector error is given a higher priority than a hopper error, and both the error sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and the error light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) correspond to the selector error. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, in addition to the currently notified selector error, a process is executed to display a screen notifying of a hopper error (step S807 in FIG. 68).

Suppose that the two types of errors described in FIGS. 73A and 73B are detected, the front door 102 is opened to eliminate these errors (error non-detection state), and the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the error notification. FIG. 73(A)(3) shows the state at this time. When the cause of the error notification is eliminated and the error detection state is resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (determination of Yes in step S706 in FIG. 67, step S708). However, when a plurality of errors are detected, one of them is canceled according to the priority, and error notification is newly executed for other errors (only one error is subject to termination of notification). FIG. 73(A)(3) shows that the error notification for the selector error is cancelled, and the error notification for the remaining hopper error is being executed. Specifically, an error code ("HO" corresponding to a hopper error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, an error sound announcing a hopper error is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode corresponding to the hopper error, and a screen announcing the hopper error is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 73(A)(3), it is assumed that the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the remaining error notification. FIG. 73(A)(4) shows the state at this time. When the cause of the error notification is eliminated and the error detection state is resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (determination of Yes in step S706 in FIG. 67, step S708). FIG. 73(A)(4) shows that the error notification regarding the hopper error has been canceled. Also, in this case, since the open sensor is in the open detection state, the payout number indicator 127 displays a code ("dr" in this example) indicating that the door is open. Furthermore, when the door open detection command is sent to the first sub-controller 400, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound, and the luminous bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open luminous mode. Note that the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed.

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (2)]
In [Error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] above, a case where a hopper error occurs after a selector error has occurred has been described, but even if the order of occurrence is reversed, the error cancellation operation will be the same. An example of this case will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, FIG. 73(B)(1) shows a state in which a hopper error is detected in the slot machine 100 with the power ON. In this case, an error code ("HO" corresponding to a hopper error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 67). Then, a process for displaying a screen for notifying a hopper error on the effect image display device 157 is executed (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 68).

Next, FIG. 73(B)(2) shows a state in which a selector error is detected in addition to the hopper error detected in FIG. 73(B)(1). That is, at this time, two types of errors are detected. When such a plurality of errors are detected, the payout number indicator 127 displays an error code for one of them in order of priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the payout number indicator 127 displays the selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 67), and the error notification is executed by the first sub-controller 400 that has received this error notification start command. Here, when a plurality of errors are detected in performing error notification by the sound output means or the light emitter, error notification is performed for one of the errors in accordance with the order of priority. In this embodiment, a selector error is given higher priority than a hopper error, and the error sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and the error light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) all correspond to the selector error. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, in addition to the currently notified selector error, a process is executed to display a screen notifying of a hopper error (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 68).

Canceling the error notification by operating the reset switch from the state in which the two types of errors described in FIGS. 73B and 2 are detected is the same as in FIGS. FIG. 73(B)(3) shows a state in which the error notification of the selector error is canceled by the first operation of the reset SW as in FIG. 73(A)(3), and FIG.

[Example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change]
An example of the operation when an error is detected during setting change will be described below with reference to FIG. In this operation example, it is assumed that the setting can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 of FIG. 63 and the set value is determined).

First, FIG. 74(A)(1) shows a state in which the power is turned on with the setting key SW in the ON state, and the setting value can be changed (setting change mode). In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 63), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), emits light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode, and executes processing for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 68). Further, a process (step S303 in FIG. 63) of displaying the current set value using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 74(A)(1) shows how the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Also, in this example, the payout number display 127 displays a code ("dr" in this example) indicating that the door is open.

FIG. 74(A)(2) shows the state when a selector error is detected from the state shown in FIG. 74(A)(1). In this case, an error code ("CE" corresponding to the selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S305 in FIG. 63). Here, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which execution of error notification by the first sub-controller 400 is restricted during execution of setting change processing or confirmation of set values (step S807 in FIG. 68). Therefore, FIG. 74(A)(2) shows that none of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.), the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the display means (effect image display device 157) has changed from the state of FIG. 74(A)(1). That is, the error notification during execution of the setting change process is configured to be executed only by the payout number display 127 . Note that while the setting change process is being executed (setting change mode) is before the start of the main controller timer interrupt process, the state is not changed by the signal from the open/close sensor. 74(A)(3) shows that even if the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIG. 74(A)(2), the state of FIG. 74(A)(2) is maintained.

The error notification during execution of the setting change process can be canceled by operating the reset SW after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detected state) (determination of Yes in step S306 in FIG. 63, step S310). However, since the reset switch is used to add and update the set value, the set value is added when the error notification is canceled. 74(A)(4) show that the error notification by the payout number display 127 is canceled (returns to the code indicating the door open) by operating the reset SW in the state of FIG. 74(A)(2), and that the setting value display device 101a displays the number 2 indicating the setting 2 that has been added and updated from the setting 1. Note that in a configuration where the reset switch plays a role of both adding and updating the set value and canceling the error notification, the error can be canceled while changing the set value, which may improve convenience.

In FIG. 74(A), the operation in the setting changeable state (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 of FIG. 63 and the set value is determined) was described, but even after the start lever 135 is operated in the setting change process (after the set value is determined), the error notification by the payout number display 127 is executed until the setting change process is completed.

[Example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation]
An example of the operation when an error is detected during setting value confirmation will be described below with reference to FIG. 74(B).

First, FIG. 74(B)(1) shows the state when the selector error is detected after the front door 102 is opened, the setting key SW is turned ON, and the setting value confirmation mode is entered. When the front door 102 is opened, the first sub-controller 400 that has received the door open detection command executes the door open notification (step S502 in FIG. 65, step S807 in FIG. 68). Specifically, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is being opened"). Then, by turning ON the setting key SW, a process of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a (step S604 in FIG. 66) is executed, and a setting value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 66). In the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this set value confirmation start command, a process for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 is executed (step S807 in FIG. 68).

By the above processing, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in the open light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output the open sound, and the effect image display device 157 displays the management screen. When an error is detected in this state, an error code ("CE" corresponding to a selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S305 in FIG. 63). However, in this embodiment, execution of error notification by the first sub-controller 400 is restricted during execution of setting change processing or confirmation of set values (step S807 in FIG. 68). That is, as shown in FIG. 74(B)(1), the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound, and the effect image display device 157 maintains the state in which the management screen is displayed. In other words, the error notification during confirmation of the set value is configured to be executed only by the payout number display 127 .

FIG. 74(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIG. 74(B)(1). In this case, by closing the front door 102, the setting value display device 101a is hidden, and the setting value confirmation mode ends (Yes in step S606 of FIG. 66). Furthermore, when the setting value confirmation mode ends, execution of error notification becomes possible. FIG. 74(B)(2) shows that the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an error sound for notifying of a selector error, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emitting mode corresponding to the selector error, and the effect image display device 157 displays a screen notifying of the selector error.

FIG. 74(B)(3) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state of FIG. 74(B)(2). In FIG. 71B, an example in which the setting value confirmation mode is restarted when the front door 102 is opened with the setting key SW in the ON state has been described, but since an error is being reported here, it is determined that the setting value confirmation valid period has not expired (determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 66). Therefore, the setting value confirmation mode is not started again, and the error notification of FIG. 74(B)(2) is continued. Depending on the error at this time, the game may be put into a state in which it is possible to proceed.

FIG. 74(B)(4) shows the state when the reset SW is operated after the cause of the error notification is removed from the state of FIG. 74(B)(3) (error non-detected state). By operating this reset switch, the error notification can be canceled (determination of Yes in step S706 in FIG. 67, step S708). By canceling this error notification, it is determined that the set value confirmation valid period has expired (Yes in step S602 of FIG. 66), and as shown in FIG.

For example, in the state of FIG. 74(B)(3), when the detection state of the open/close sensor is forced to be closed detection state even though the door is opened, if the reset switch is operated, the state where the management screen is displayed (setting confirmation mode) is not changed to the state where the customer waiting effect is displayed (game ready state).

[Conditions for end of error notification]
In the above example, the error notification is canceled by operating the reset switch after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detected state). Strictly speaking, the error notification can be canceled when the error notification end condition (the cause of the error currently being reported is removed (error non-detected state) and the execution period of the error notification exceeds the period of one cycle of the error sound) is satisfied when the reset switch is operated. The error notification end conditions will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a timing chart regarding error detection.

First, the operation at timings t1 to t6 will be described.

At timing t1, the first selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal start from timing t1. This security signal is a signal for informing the outside of the slot machine 100 of the occurrence of an error, and is output from the information output circuit 334. FIG.

At timing t2, the reset SW is operated. At this time, the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t3, the first selector error is not detected.

At timing t4, the reset SW is operated. Although the selector error is not detected at this time, the selector error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t5, the output of the first cycle of the selector error sound is completed, and the output of the second cycle is started.

At timing t6, the reset SW is operated. At this time, since the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is being output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification is cancelled. Also, all error reporting ends, and the security signal is turned off.

Next, operations from timings t7 to t12 will be described.

At timing t7, the first hopper error is detected. For this hopper error, the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) are shown to start from timing t7.

At timing t8, the first hopper error is not detected, and the second selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error and the output of the selector error sound start from timing t8. Since the selector error has a higher priority than the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound is temporarily terminated when the selector error sound is output. In addition, the state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) remains unchanged.

At timing t9, the second selector error is not detected.

At timing t10, the reset SW is operated. At this time, since the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is being output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification corresponding to the selector error is canceled. On the other hand, the error notification corresponding to the first hopper error is not canceled, and the output of the hopper error sound that had once ended is restarted. In this example, the configuration is such that the hopper error sound is output again from the beginning, but the configuration may be such that the volume is changed without outputting the error sound again. The state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) remains unchanged.

At timing t11, the reset SW is operated. Although the hopper error is not detected at this time, the hopper error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification termination condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t12, the reset SW is operated. At this time, the hopper error is not detected and the hopper error sound is being output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification is cancelled. Also, all error reporting ends, and the security signal is turned off.

Next, operations from timings t13 to t15 will be described.

At timing t13, a third selector error is detected. In response to this selector error, the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) start from timing t13.

At timing t14, the third selector error is not detected, and the front door 102 is in the open detection state. In this example, the selector error sound is not output in accordance with the period when the front door 102 is in the open detection state.

At timing t15, the front door 102 is in a closed detection state. In this example, when the front door 102 is detected to be closed, the selector error sound is returned to the output state. In this example, the selector error sound is re-output from the beginning, but the volume may be changed without re-outputting the error sound.

In the above example, the security signal is turned on in accordance with the period during which the error is reported. However, for example, when an error is detected, the security signal may be turned on for a certain period of time and then turned off for a certain period of time. With this configuration, for example, even if a plurality of errors occur, the security signal for the first error is turned on, then turned off for a certain period of time, and then the security signal for the second error is turned on, so that the number of error occurrences can be easily grasped.

In the present embodiment, when a plurality of errors have occurred, the error display corresponding to each of the plurality of errors is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. However, it is also possible to display only the error display of the priority error in the same manner as the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 or the error sound output from the sound output means. In this case, when the second selector error is detected at the timing t8 in FIG. 75, the display of the selector error and the output of the selector error sound for this selector error start at the timing t8, and since the selector error has a higher priority than the hopper error, the display of the hopper error and the output of the hopper error sound are temporarily terminated. Then, when the selector error is canceled, the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, etc. are started as at timing t10.

[Modified example of error notification and error cancellation]
[Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation (1)] and [Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (2)] described the operation in which the reset SW is operated in a state in which a plurality of error notifications are being executed and all the causes of the error notifications are removed, and one of the error notifications is canceled in accordance with the order of priority. Here, if the cause of the error notification has been partially eliminated, the error notification may be canceled for the error whose cause has been eliminated. Alternatively, one of the error notifications may be targeted according to the order of priority, and the error notification may be canceled when the cause of the error notification has been eliminated. An operation example when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, the states of FIGS. 76(A)(1) and 76(A)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 73(A)(1) and 73(A)(2), respectively.

76A and 76B, the front door 102 is opened to eliminate only the hopper error (error non-detection state), and the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the error notification. FIG. 76(A)(3) shows the state at this time. Here, among the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error with the higher priority is targeted for cancellation, but since the cause of this selector error has not been eliminated, the error notification is not cancelled. FIG. 76(A)(3) shows that the reset SW has been pressed once, but the error notification has not been cancelled. If the reset switch is operated to cancel the error notification of the hopper error whose cause has been eliminated, the error notification will be canceled without the administrator recognizing the hopper error. Since such a situation does not occur in the example of FIG. 76(A), the administrator can cancel the error notification after recognizing the error.

Further, it is assumed that the selector error is resolved (error non-detected state) from the state in which two kinds of errors are detected in FIGS. FIG. 76(A)(4) shows the state at this time. Here, among the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error with the higher priority is targeted for cancellation, and since the cause of this selector error has been eliminated, the error notification for the selector error is cancelled. FIG. 76(A)(4) shows that as a result of pressing the reset SW once, the error notification of the selector error is cancelled, and the error notification of the remaining hopper error is being executed.

Next, the states of FIGS. 76(B)(1) and 76(B)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 73(B)(1) and 73(B)(2), respectively. The state of FIG. 76(B)(2) is the same as that of FIG. 76(A)(2), and the states of subsequent FIGS. 76(B)(3) and 76(B)(4) are the same as those of FIG. 76(A)(3) and FIG. 76(A)(4), respectively. That is, the example of FIG. 76B differs from that of FIG. 76A in the order of error notification until two types of errors are detected. However, this difference in the order of error reporting has no effect on error cancellation.

[Modified example when the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is provided with a front door 102, and in the above [Example of operation when the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation], an example in which the state of the slot machine 100 changes depending on the opening/closing state of the front door 102 has been described.

Here, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of doors are provided, such as the front door 102 being composed of two doors, an upper door and a lower door, how to apply the above operation becomes a problem. An operation example when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 77, the open/close sensor for the upper door is "open/close detection SW1", and the open/close sensor for the lower door is "open/close detection SW2". It is also assumed that a door key is provided for collectively locking these doors, and the state of this door key is detected by "door key SW". It is assumed that the door key SW has a "closed detection state" in which it detects that it is in a position to lock all the doors, an "open detection state" that it detects that it is in a position to unlock all the doors, and a "non-detection state" in which the door key is not inserted.

First, in FIG. 77(A)(1), in the slot machine 100 in the power ON state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the player to start playing), the opening/closing detection SW1 and the opening/closing detection SW2 are both in the closed detection state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in the customer waiting light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output the customer waiting BGM, and the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 77(A)(2), the door key is used to open both the upper door and the lower door from the state shown in FIG. 77(A)(1) (open/close detection SW1 and open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW are both in the open detection state), and the setting key SW is turned on. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 65), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and executes a process of emitting light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 68). Further, since the setting key SW is in the ON state, the current setting value can be checked (setting value confirmation mode) (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 66). In this state, a process (step S604 in FIG. 66) of displaying the current set values using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 77(A)(2) shows the setting value display device 101a displaying the number 1 indicating setting 1. In FIG. Also, a set value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 66), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command executes processing for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 68). The output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained as the open sound, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained as the open light emission mode.

FIGS. 77A and 77C show a state in which both the upper door and the lower door are closed from the state shown in FIGS. During execution of the set value confirmation process (set value confirmation mode), when the open/close detection SW1, the open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the closed detection state, the set value confirmation mode is terminated in the same manner as when the setting key is turned off (determination of Yes in step S606 in FIG. 66). FIG. 77(A)(3) shows that the display on the setting value display device 101a is in a non-display state because the setting value confirmation mode is terminated while the setting key is in the ON state.

When the upper and lower doors are opened again from the state of (A) (3) in FIG. 77, the set value confirmation mode is started again because the setting key is already in the ON state (determination of Yes in step S603 in FIG. 66). FIG. 77(A)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 77(A)(2).

The modified example described above is configured to perform the same operation as when the front door 102 described with reference to FIG. Further, when the open/close detection SW1, the open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the closed state, the same operation as when the front door 102 described in FIG. 71(B) is in the closed state is performed. Here, the operation when the open/close detection SW1, the open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW do not all match will be described with reference to FIG. 77(B).

First, the states of FIGS. 77(B)(1) and 77(B)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 77(A)(1) and 77(A)(2), respectively. Further, FIG. 77(B)(3) shows a state in which only the upper door is closed from the state shown in FIG. 77(B)(2) (open/close detection SW1 is closed detection state) and the door key is pulled out (door key SW is not detected state). FIG. 77(B)(4) shows the state when the lower door is in the closed state (open/close detection SW2 is in the closed detection state) from the state shown in FIG. 77(B)(3). FIG. 77(B)(5) shows the state (the same state as FIG. 77(A)(3)) when the door key is inserted from the state shown in FIG. 77(B)(4) to the position where all the doors are locked (the door key SW is closed detection state).

FIG. 77(B)(3) shows that after the opening/closing detection SW1, the opening/closing detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the open detection state, these states do not agree with each other, resulting in a state that is neither a set value confirmation state nor a playable state (game impossible state). In this state, the set values displayed on the set value display device 101a are hidden, and the effect image display device 157 displays the message "The door is open." In this state, the game cannot be started.

Further, FIG. 77(B)(4) shows that the opening/closing detection SW1 and the opening/closing detection SW2 are in the closed detection state, but the door key SW is in the non-detection state (the opening/closing detection SW1, the opening/closing detection SW2, and the door key SW do not match), and in this case also the game is disabled. After that, when the door key is inserted to lock all the doors (the door key SW is in the closed detection state), a game becomes possible as shown in FIG. 77(B)(5) (same state as FIG. 77(A)(3)).

As in the example of FIG. 77A, when a plurality of doors are provided, if all of the plurality of doors are in the open state, the setting value confirmation state may be shifted to in the same manner as when the front door 102 is in the open state. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 77(A), not only the states of the plurality of doors but also the state of the door key are determined together, but the state of the door key may not be determined. Also, in FIG. 77(B), an example was described in which a game becomes impossible if the states of a plurality of doors or door keys do not match during the period from the transition to the setting value confirmation state to the end thereof, but such a state may not be provided. Also, unlike the example of FIG. 77, for example, the transition to the setting value confirmation state may be performed based on the state of one of a plurality of doors, or the transition to the setting value confirmation state may be performed based on the state of the door key.

[Regarding the check operation of the production means]
In this embodiment, various effects means such as the effect image display device 157, shutter 163, speakers 272 and 277, and various lamps 420 are provided. An example of the confirmation operation of such effect means will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. In this embodiment, when the front door 102 (open/close sensor) is closed during setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) ends. However, in the following example, the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) continues without ending even if the front door 102 (open/close sensor) is closed during setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode).

[Check operation of production means (1)]
The example of FIG. 78 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 . In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with an effect lamp 163L.

FIGS. 78(a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of operations when power is turned on. In this example, it is assumed that when the power is turned on, the shutter 163 in the initial position is closed and then returned to the initial position for confirmation.

FIG. 78(a) shows the state before the power is turned on. In this state, nothing is displayed on the effect image display device 157 and nothing is output from the speakers 272 and 277 . The shutter 163 is positioned on the left and right sides of the effect image display device 157. This position is the state in which the shutter 163 is completely open, and this position is the initial position.

FIG. 78(b) shows the state when the power is turned on from the state of FIG. 78(a). In this state, the effect image display device 157 displays the message "starting up", and the speakers 272 and 277 output the voice "the power has been turned on". Note that the shutter 163 remains at the initial position.

FIG. 78(c) shows that the demonstration image display device 157 has started the demonstration effect from the state of FIG. It also shows that the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 is started, and the shutter 163 that was in the initial position is moving in the closing direction. Also, at this time, the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 is in the lighting mode for the demonstration production.

FIG. 78(d) shows that the shutter 163 has moved further from the state of FIG. 78(c) to a completely closed state.

FIG. 78(e) shows that the shutter 163 is moving toward the initial position from the state of FIG. 78(d).

FIG. 78(f) shows that the shutter 163 has returned to the initial position from the state of FIG. 78(e).

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) to 78(f), it is possible to confirm whether or not the shutter 163 operates normally by the confirmation operation when the power is turned on.

Further, during the confirming operation, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes as the opening/closing state of the front door 102 changes. The state of the front door 102 can also be confirmed by this change. It should be noted that extinguishing may be one of the lighting equivalents for the change in the lighting mode. FIGS. 78(g) and 78(h) show the state when the open/closed state of the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 78(b) (for example, from the closed state to the open state). FIGS. 78(g) and 78(h) show that the lighting mode of the performance lamp 163L changes due to the change in the opening/closing state of the front door 102 in the states of FIGS. 78(c) and 78(d). In this example, since the front door 102 is in an open state, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a voice saying "the door is open." Incidentally, as shown in the flow from FIG. 78(h) to FIG. 78(e), the lighting mode of the effect preparation lamp 163L changed due to the change in the opening/closing state of the front door 102 returns to the original state when the opening/closing state of the front door 102 returns to the state before the change. Also, in this example, since the front door 102 is closed, the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped.

[Check operation of production means (2)]
The example of FIG. 79 is an example of the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 . In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by an operation from the management screen. Note that the management screen here is not limited to the one displayed during the setting change or setting value confirmation described above, and may be displayed by a specific operation by the administrator, for example.

FIG. 79( a ) shows a state in which a management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . Here, it is assumed that "operation check" is selected from the menu displayed on this management screen, the screen is switched to the screen shown in FIG. 79(b), and "speaker check" is selected from the menu displayed on this switched screen.

The operation for confirmation, which is started by selecting the above "speaker check", outputs confirmation sounds in the order of the right speaker, the left speaker, and the lower speaker, and repeats the output of the above sounds in order until "speaker check end" is selected. Note that the number of repetitions may be set in advance, or the execution time of the confirmation operation may be set in advance.

FIGS. 79(c) to (e) show how the first output in the confirmation operation is performed in the order of the right speaker, the left speaker, and the lower speaker. FIG. 79(f) shows how the second output in the confirmation operation is performed from the right speaker.

If "speaker check" is selected again during execution of the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation being executed is terminated and a new confirmation operation is executed.

FIGS. 79(g) to (i) show that "speaker check" is selected from the menu displayed on the screen of FIG. 79(b), and the output to the right speaker and the left speaker is executed as the first output in the confirmation operation. Here, FIG. 79(j) shows a situation in which, by selecting "speaker check" again in the state of FIG. 79(i), the confirmation operation in progress is terminated, and the output from the right speaker is executed in the second output in the new confirmation operation. After that, FIG. 79(k) shows that the confirmation operation being executed has ended by selecting "speaker check end" in the state of FIG. 79(j).

Here, in the above example, the configuration in which the confirming operation is terminated by selecting "speaker check end" has been described, but for example, the confirming operation may be terminated when the front door 102 is opened. FIG. 79(l) shows that the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is completed by opening the front door 102 from the state of FIG. 79(i), and the voice saying "the door is open" is output. In this case, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 may be resumed when the front door 102 is closed, or may not be resumed. When the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is resumed, the confirmation operation may be resumed from the state when the front door 102 is opened, or a new confirmation operation may be started regardless of the state when the front door 102 is opened.

[Check operation of production means (3)]
The example of FIG. 80 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 . In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with an effect lamp 163L. In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by the operation from the management screen (see FIG. 79(b)). Note that the management screen here is not limited to the one displayed during the setting change or setting value confirmation described above, and may be displayed by a specific operation by the administrator, for example.

FIG. 80(a) shows a menu displayed when "operation check" is selected from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "movable object check" is selected from this menu.

80(b) to (f) show that the shutter 163 is closed from the initial position where the shutter 163 is completely open, and then returned to the initial position for confirmation.

During execution of this confirmation operation, while the front door 102 is in an open state, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes. FIG. 80(c) shows that the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L is changed by opening the front door 102 . Also, while the front door 102 is in the open state, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a voice saying "the door is open." Further, FIG. 80(d) shows that the front door 102 is closed so that the performance lamp 163L returns to its original lighting mode, and the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped.

Further, when "movable object check" is selected again during execution of this confirmation operation, the confirmation operation is not newly started, and nothing is executed in response to this operation. In FIG. 80(d), "movable body check" is selected again during execution of the confirmation operation, but FIG. 80(e) shows that the confirmation operation being executed continues as it is regardless of this operation.

FIG. 80(g) shows a menu displayed when "operation check" is selected from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "movable object check" is selected from this menu.

FIGS. 80(h) to (l) show that the shutter 163 is closed from the initial position where the shutter 163 is completely open, and then returned to the initial position for confirmation.

If "speaker check" is selected during execution of this confirming operation, the confirming operation of the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(k) shows that the confirming operation of the shutter 163 and the confirming operation of the speakers 272 and 277 are being executed in parallel. Further, FIG. 80(l) shows that when the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 is completed, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is continuously executed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Hereinafter, configurations of the invention based on the above embodiments will be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above description (especially [Example of operation when confirming setting values] [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while confirming setting values]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
open/close determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door;
A gaming machine comprising predetermined operation means (e.g., setting key SW) having a first operation state (e.g., setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (e.g., setting key SW is ON) as operation states,
The main control means is
Any one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can be progressed and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 in FIG. 66) can be set,
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state, when the predetermined operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state can be started (for example, a change from the state of FIG. 70(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 70(B)(3)),
Means capable of ending the setting confirmation state and starting the playable state even if the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state when the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the closed state in the setting confirmation state (for example, a change from the state of FIG. 71(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 71(B)(3)).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enter a state in which a game can be played simply by closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Also, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation state from being seen by the player, thereby improving security.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The main control means is
In a state in which the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state in the play-enabled state, if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the game-enabled state is ended and the setting confirmation state is started (for example, change from the state of FIG. 71 (B) (3) to the state of FIG. 71 (B) (4)).
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machines described above, for example, when a manager tries to play a game, he or she can immediately check the set value by simply opening the door before or after this. Also, even if the manager forgets to end the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is immediately entered just by opening the door, so that the administrator can immediately notice that the setting confirmation state was not ended by the normal procedure.

In addition, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The main control means is
When the reel is rotating in the state where the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state in the playable state, even if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the setting confirmation state is not started (for example, [operation example (1) when setting key SW is ON], change from the state of FIG. 72(A)(1) to the state of FIG. 72(A)(2));
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, if the door is opened during a game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, so the security can be improved by not controlling to the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the game machine described above,
error detection means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error;
further comprising an error notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing a predetermined error notification,
The error reporting means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIG. 74(B)(1)),
Means that does not restart the setting confirmation state when the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means (e.g., [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 66, change from the state of FIG. 74 (B) (2) to the state of FIG. 74 (B) (3)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, if the door is opened during error notification, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, so the security can be improved by not controlling to the setting confirmation state.

In addition, in the above description (especially [Example of operation when changing settings] [Example of operation when confirming setting values] [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while changing settings] [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while confirming setting values])
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
open/close determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door;
A gaming machine comprising predetermined operation means (e.g., setting key SW) having a first operation state (e.g., setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (e.g., setting key SW is ON) as operation states,
The main control means is
Any one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can be progressed, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set value can be checked (for example, a state in which the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a in step S604 in FIG. 66), and a setting change state in which any one of a plurality of set values can be set (for example, a state in which the set value can be changed in steps S306 and S307 in FIG. 63) can be set.
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state, when the predetermined operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state can be started (for example, a change from the state of FIG. 70(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 70(B)(3)),
It is possible to start the setting change state based on power being turned on while the predetermined operation means is operated in the second operation state (for example, change from the state of FIG. 70(A)(1) to the state of FIG. 70(A)(2)),
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the closed state in the setting confirmation state, even if the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state can be ended and the playable state can be started (for example, change from the state of FIG. 71(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 71(B)(3)),
In the setting change state, even if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state, the game ready state is not started (for example, a change from the state of FIG. 71(A)(2) to the state of FIG. 71(A)(3));
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enter a state in which a game can be played simply by closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Also, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation state from being seen by the player, thereby improving security.

On the other hand, as for the setting change state, if the game can be started immediately only by closing the door when the game is not finished by the normal procedure, there is a possibility that the setting value expected by the administrator is not set. Therefore, security and convenience can be improved by preventing the game from starting when the door is closed, unlike the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The main control means is
In a state in which the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state in the play-enabled state, if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the game-enabled state is ended and the setting confirmation state is started (for example, change from the state of FIG. 71 (B) (3) to the state of FIG. 71 (B) (4)).
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machines described above, for example, when a manager tries to play a game, he or she can immediately check the set value by simply opening the door before or after this. Also, even if the manager forgets to end the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is immediately entered just by opening the door, so that the administrator can immediately notice that the setting confirmation state was not ended by the normal procedure.

In addition, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The main control means is
When the reel is rotating in the state where the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state in the playable state, even if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the setting confirmation state is not started (for example, [operation example (1) when setting key SW is ON], change from the state of FIG. 72(A)(1) to the state of FIG. 72(A)(2));
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, if the door is opened during a game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, so the security can be improved by not controlling to the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the game machine described above,
error detection means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error;
further comprising an error notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing a predetermined error notification,
The error reporting means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIG. 74(B)(1)),
Means that does not restart the setting confirmation state when the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means (e.g., [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 66, change from the state of FIG. 74 (B) (2) to the state of FIG. 74 (B) (3)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, if the door is opened during error notification, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, so the security can be improved by not controlling to the setting confirmation state.

In addition, in the above description (especially [effect means check operation (1)] [effect means check operation (2)] [effect means check operation (3)]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls games,
production means including first production means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) and second production means (for example, shutter 163) different from the first production means;
a predetermined operating means (for example, a cross button);
Confirmation operation means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for executing predetermined confirmation operations (e.g., FIGS. 78 (b) to (f), FIGS. 79 (c) to (e)) for the production means A gaming machine comprising,
The main control means is
means for setting a predetermined state (for example, a state in which a management screen is displayed);
The confirmation operation means is
When a first operation (for example, selection of "speaker check" in FIG. 79(b)) is performed on the predetermined operation means in the predetermined state, it is possible to execute the confirmation operation on the first effect means,
When a second operation (e.g., selection of "movable body check" in FIG. 80(a)) is performed on the predetermined operating means in the predetermined state, it is possible to execute the confirmation operation on the second effect means,
When the first operation is performed while the first effect means is executing the confirmation action, the confirmation action being executed is terminated and a new confirmation action for the first effect means is started (for example, change from FIG. 79 (i) to the state of FIG. 79 (j)),
Even if the second operation is performed while the second effect means is executing the confirmation action, the confirmation action being executed is not terminated (for example, change from FIG. 80(d) to the state of FIG. 80(e)) means,
A game machine characterized by:

The effect means of the game table is not limited to the speakers 272 and 277, the various lamps 420, the effect image display device 157, and the shutter 163 of the present embodiment, but also includes, for example, a vibrating means, and various operations unique to each effect means can be executed. In the above-mentioned game machine, in executing the confirming operation of the effecting means, the convenience of confirming the operation may be improved by dividing the operation into the first effecting means and the second effecting means according to the feature. Note that the first effect means and the second effect means are not limited to the structure of the effect means of this embodiment.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first effect means includes a plurality of effect means (e.g., left speaker, right speaker, lower speaker),
The confirmation action for the first effect means is an action of sequentially executing a predetermined action for each of the plurality of effect means included in the first effect means (for example, the actions of FIGS. 79(c) to (e)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned game machine, even if confirmation operations of a plurality of performance means are performed, the operation can be immediately confirmed again from the first performance means by performing the first operation, and the convenience in confirming the operation can be improved. As for the first effect means, various effect means can be adopted without being limited to the structure of the effect means of the present embodiment.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The confirmation operation means is
When the power is turned on, even if the second operation is not performed on the operation means, the confirmation operation for the second effect means may be executed (for example, the operations of FIGS. 78 (a) to (f)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, the first effect means can perform a new confirmation action even during the confirmation action, but the second effect means cannot perform a new confirmation action during the confirmation action. However, by providing an opportunity to execute the confirmation operation for the second effect means when the power is turned on, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to confirm the operation for the second effect means. In addition, it is possible to quickly detect a malfunction by checking operation when the power is turned on. Note that the confirmation operation for the second effect means when the power is turned on is not limited to a configuration that is always executed, and may be executed depending on some condition.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The confirmation operation means is
When the second operation is performed while the first effect means is executing the confirmation action, the confirmation action for the second effect means is performed while continuing the confirmation action for the first effect means (for example, the action of FIG. 80 (k)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, the confirmation operation of the first effect means and the confirmation operation of the second effect means can be executed in parallel, thereby shortening the time required for confirming the operation.

In addition, the game machine described above,
further comprising setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The predetermined state is
a setting change state in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set;
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, the game machine described above,
further comprising setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The predetermined state is
A setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed,
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first directing means is means for outputting sound,
The second effect means is a movable body,
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the above description (especially [error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] [error notification and error cancellation operation example (2)] [error notification termination conditions]),
a first error detection means (e.g. selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (e.g. selector error);
Error notification means capable of executing error notification (for example, payout number indicator 127, speakers 272, 277);
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means (for example, reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification,
The error reporting means is
When the first error detection means detects the first error, it is possible to execute a first error notification for notifying that the first error has been detected (for example, FIG. 73 (A) (1)),
During a first period after the execution of the first error notification (for example, the period until "selector error" is output once), the first error notification is continued even if the cancellation operation is performed (for example, timings t2 and t4 in FIG. 75), and the first error notification is terminated when the cancellation operation is performed after the first period has elapsed since the first error notification was performed (for example, steps S309 and S318 in FIG. 63, and FIG. 6). 7 error notification end condition in step S707, timing t6 in FIG. 75),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned game machine, since the error is not canceled for the first period after the error notification is executed, the manager (or the players) can more surely grasp the occurrence of the error, and the security can be improved. In the above-described embodiment, the first period is a period corresponding to one cycle of the error sound. However, the first period is not limited as long as the period during which the error notification is executed to some extent is ensured. Moreover, the above configuration can be applied to various types of errors, not limited to the errors in the above embodiments.

In addition, the game machine described above,
Security signal output means (for example, information output circuit 443) for outputting a security signal to the outside of the gaming machine based on the occurrence of an error,
The security signal output means is
means for continuing to output the security signal in the first period after the first error notification is performed (for example, FIG. 75);
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, by securing the output time of the security signal, the security signal can be normally output to the outside, and the security can be improved.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first error notification is
A notification including a sound in which a predetermined announcement sound (for example, the sound of "selector error") is repeatedly output,
The first period is
is a period longer than the period required to output one time of the predetermined announcement sound,
A game machine characterized by:

In the game machine, an announcement sound is output at least once until the error is released, so that the administrator (or the players) can more surely grasp the occurrence of the error, and the security can be improved.

In addition, the game machine described above,
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
an opening/closing detection means (for example, an opening/closing sensor) capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the door body;
The predetermined operating means is
Means provided at a position operable only when the door is in an open state,
The first error notification is
Notification including display of a predetermined error image (for example, the image of the effect image display device 157 in FIG. 73(A)(1)),
The error reporting means is
When the open state is detected by the opening/closing detection means when executing the first error notification, the audio output of the first error notification is stopped and the predetermined error image is displayed (for example, timings t14 to t15 in FIG. 75),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned game machine, when the manager opens the door during the error notification to cancel the error, by stopping the output of the error sound while leaving the error image at the minimum, the annoyance of the error sound in the error cancellation work can be eliminated.

In addition, the game machine described above,
Further comprising a second error detection means (e.g., hopper sensor) capable of detecting a second error (e.g., hopper error),
The error reporting means is
When the second error detection means detects the second error, it is possible to execute a second error notification to notify that the second error has been detected (for example, FIG. 73 (B) (1)),
There is a case where the first error notification is terminated and the second error notification is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, timing t10 in FIG. 75),
In the second error notification in the first case, the second error notification is continued even if the cancellation operation is performed in the second period after the second error notification is performed (for example, the period until "Hopper error" is output once) (for example, timings t10 to t12 in FIG. 75).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, since a period is provided for reliably executing error reporting for each of a plurality of errors, the manager (or players) can more reliably grasp the occurrence of each error, and security can be improved. In the above-described embodiment, the second period is a period corresponding to one cycle of the error sound. However, the second period is not limited as long as the period during which the error notification is executed to some extent is ensured.

In addition, in the above description (particularly, [Error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] [Error notification and error cancellation operation example during setting change]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
error detection means (eg, selector sensor) capable of detecting a predetermined error (eg, selector error);
A gaming machine equipped with an error notification means (for example, a payout number display 127, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing error notification,
The main control means is
Any one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can be progressed and a setting change state in which one of a plurality of set values can be set (for example, a state in which the set values can be changed in steps S306 and S307 in FIG. 63) can be set,
The error reporting means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means, it is possible to execute a predetermined error notification for notifying that the predetermined error has been detected (for example, FIG. 73(A)(1), FIG. 74(A)(2)),
In the playable state, the predetermined error notification is executed in the first mode (for example, FIG. 73 (A) (1)),
Means for executing the predetermined error notification in a second mode different from the first mode in the setting change state (for example, FIG. 74 (A) (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine, the mode of error notification is differentiated between the playable state in which the player plays a game and the setting change state in which the administrator changes the setting value. In this way, by varying the mode of error notification according to the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine that does not make the administrator feel troublesome while maintaining security. As for the error notification means, various notification means can be employed without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first mode is a mode that is more conspicuous than the second mode, a mode that is louder than the second mode, or a mode that is easier to recognize than the second mode (for example, in FIG. 74 (A) (2), error notification is performed only by the payout number display 127, but in FIG. 73 (A) (1), at least the payout number display 127 and speakers 272, 277 are used to perform error notification),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine, it is easier to grasp the error notification in the playable state in which the player plays a game than in the setting change state in which the administrator changes the setting value. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that ensures that the error notification is transmitted more reliably and does not make the manager feel troublesome during the error processing stage.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The plurality of states include a setting confirmation state in which the currently set value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 66),
The error reporting means is
In the setting confirmation state, means for executing the predetermined error notification in the second mode (for example, [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 74 (B) (1)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine, the setting confirmation state in which the administrator confirms the setting value is configured to be in the same error notification mode as the setting change state. In this way, by varying the mode of error notification according to the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine that does not make the administrator feel troublesome while maintaining security.

In addition, the game machine described above,
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
open/close determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door;
a predetermined operating means (e.g., setting key SW) having a first operating state (e.g., setting key SW is OFF) and a second operating state (e.g., setting key SW is ON) as an operating state;
The main control means is
Means capable of starting the setting confirmation state when the predetermined operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state when the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state (for example, a change from the state of FIG. 70(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 70(B)(3));
The error reporting means is
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is closed while the predetermined error notification is being performed in the second mode in the setting confirmation state, the notification mode of the predetermined error notification is changed from the second mode to the first mode (for example, change from the state of FIG. 74 (B) (1) to the state of FIG. 74 (B) (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, the mode of error notification changes at the moment the door is closed, so that the manager can easily notice that he/she has forgotten to cancel the error.

In addition, in the above description (especially [error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] [error notification and error cancellation operation example (2)]),
error detection means capable of detecting errors (e.g., selector sensor, hopper sensor); first notification means capable of executing error notification (e.g., effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means (for example, reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification,
The error detection means is
a first error detection means (e.g., selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (e.g., a selector error); and a second error detection means (e.g., a hopper sensor) capable of detecting a second error (e.g., a hopper error);
The first reporting means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means, a first error notification (for example, FIG. 73 (A) (1)) for notifying that the first error has been detected can be executed,
When the second error detection means detects the second error, a second error notification (for example, FIG. 73 (B) (1)) for notifying that the second error has been detected can be executed,
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means while the first error is detected by the first error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIG. 73 (A) (2)),
In the first case, when the first error notification and the second error notification are being performed, the cancellation operation is performed once after removing the cause of the first error and the second error cause, and the second error notification is continued while the first error notification is terminated (e.g., FIG. 73 (A) (3)).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above game machine, even if the two types of error factors are removed, by canceling the error step by step, it is possible to prompt the manager to confirm each error location and improve security.

In addition, the game machine described above,
a second notification means capable of executing error notification (e.g., payout number indicator 127), wherein the second notification means is means for not executing the second error notification while executing the first error notification in the first case (e.g., FIG. 73 (A) (2));
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, it may be possible to improve security by reporting the first error at two locations.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first reporting means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means while the second error is detected by the second error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIG. 73 (B) (2)),
In the second case, when the first error notification and the second error notification are being performed, the cancellation operation is performed once after removing the cause of the first error and the second error cause, and the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIG. 73 (B) (3)).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above game machine, even if the two types of error factors are removed, by canceling the error step by step, it is possible to prompt the manager to confirm each error location and improve security.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The second notification means is means for executing the first error notification in the second case, but not executing the second error notification (for example, FIG. 73 (B) (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, it may be possible to improve security by reporting the first error at two locations.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a slot machine using game balls (for example, pachinko balls) as a game medium, a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a rock-and-roll game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as operating on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game machine) or a personal computer, by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. This includes outputting digitized data to a storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the scope of the present invention, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Reel window 123 Notification lamp 127 Payout number display 130, 131, 132 Medal insertion button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Effect image display device 192 Effect button 272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit

Claims (4)

a game progress means for progressing a game;
Production control means for executing production based on instructions from the game progress means;
A gaming machine comprising an operating means operable by a player,
The game progress means is
It is possible to generate a freeze state that waits for the progress of the game,
The production control means is
It is capable of executing a first operation promotion effect that may end based on the elapse of a predetermined time,
It is possible to execute a second operation promotion effect that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time,
After the freeze state is started by the game progress means, there is a case where the first operation promotion effect is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
There is a case where the second operation promotion effect is started after the first operation promotion effect started after the freeze state is started (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
In the first case, in the frozen state, a period in which the operation to the operation means prompted by the first operation promotion effect is valid starts,
In the second case, after the freeze state ends, a period in which the operation for the operation means prompted by the second operation promotion effect is valid begins.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1 ,
The operation means includes a first operation means capable of changing the effect being executed based on the operation,
The first operation promotion effect is
A production prompting the operation of the first operation means,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 2 ,
The second operation promotion effect is
A production prompting the operation of the first operation means,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 2 ,
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means operated to start rotation of the plurality of reels;
further comprising
The operation means includes a second operation means for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The second operation promotion effect is
A production that prompts the stop operation of the second operation means,
A playground characterized by:

Images